Revit Structure 2009

Imperial Tutorials

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1

Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 2

Express Workshops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Structural Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Column Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Structural Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Elements to Multiple Levels . . . . . . . . Adding Foundations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View . . . . . . Placing a Detail in a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details . . . . Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library . Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section . . . . . Adding a Cantilever to a Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . Coping Beam Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Final Annotation and Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . 19 . 20 . 21 . 24 . 27 . 32 . 35 . 47 . 49 . 55 . 59 . 62 . 63 . 65 . 66 . 70 . 73 . 75 . 79 . 82 . 84 . 98

v

Chapter 3

Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Structural Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 . 107 . 109 . 112 . 113 . 115 . 115 . 118 . 120 . 122 . 125 . 127 . 128 . 130 . 130 . 131 . 137 . 139 . 142 . 143 . 144 . 146

Chapter 4

Starting a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Importing/Linking Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File . . . . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture Linking a Revit Architecture File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 . 149 . 151 . 154

Chapter 5

Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . . . Adding Horizontal Framing . . . . . . . . . . Adding Beam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Composite Deck . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shear Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Isolated Foundations . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 . . . Adding Cantilevered Beams . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck . . . Adding Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Slab . . . . . . . . . Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab . . . . . Adding Miter Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Curved Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening in a Beam . . . . . . . . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family . . . . . Adding Foundation Walls . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Piers or Pilasters . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels . . Placing a Wall Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 . 162 . 167 . 171 . 173 . 180 . 182 . 184 . 186 . 188 . 188 . 194 . 196 . 199 . 201 . 205 . 216 . 224 . 229 . 236 . 239 . 241 . 246 . 249 . 250 . 257

vi | Contents

Chapter 6

Precast

Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 . 261 . 263 . 264 . 265 . 265

Creating a Precast Beam System . . . . . . . . . Adding a Beam System to the Structure . . Changing the Beam System Properties . . . Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing . Modifying the Precast Beam Family . . . . . . . Adding a Chamfer to the Beam . . . . . .

Chapter 7

Creating

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 . 275 . 280 . 280 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . Creating a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . Adding a Sheet to the Project . . . . . . Creating New Views to Add to Sheets . . Creating a Detail Library . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail Library . Importing Details from the Library . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8

Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Scheduling Beam Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Structural Framing Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Type Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Instance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create the Graphical Column Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change the Schedule Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 297 . 299 . 302 . 307 . 313 . 316 . 316 . 320 . 324 . 326 . 326

Chapter 9

Steel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Setting Up Section Views on Sheets . . . . . . . . . Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets . Detailing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Welded Bracing Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Bolted Angle Detail . . . . . . . . . Creating a Facade Support Detail . . . . . . . Creating a Drafting View Detail . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 . 329 . 333 . 333 . 339 . 341 . 344 . 345

Chapter 10

Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Concrete Modelling Examples . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement in a Column . . . . . . . . Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . Area Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . . Path Reinforcement in a Slab . . . . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing . . . . Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 . 351 . 359 . 364 . 373 . 378 . 382 . 393

Chapter 11

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Contents | vii

Controlling Witness Line Location . . . . . . Modifying Dimension Properties . . . . . . . Working with Alignments and Constraints . . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions . Working with Spot Dimensions . . . . . . . . Annotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Beam Tag . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 411 . 414 . 415 . 420 . 421 . 428 . 428 . 435

Chapter 12

Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Assigning Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making the Entire Workset Editable . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 . 439 . 445 . 448 . 453 . 457

Chapter 13

Project Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Coordination Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening the Modified Revit Architecture Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . . . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . Add Remaining Revisions . . . . . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 . 461 . 468 . 474 . 474 . 475 . 476 . 480 . 481

Chapter 14

Structural Analytical Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analytical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Loads to the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Project Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documenting the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 . 486 . 494 . 496 . 505 . 507 . 509 . 512 . 514 . 531 . 534

Chapter 15

Exporting Revit Structure Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Exporting CAD Formats . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD . . Exporting Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 . 535 . 539 . 540

Chapter 16

About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Chapter 17

Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating Custom Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family . . . Customizing a Castellated Beam . . . . . . Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 . 551 . 563 . 565

viii | Contents

Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. 573 . 574 . 581 . 581 . 584 . 592

Chapter 18

Truss Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Working with Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Trusses to a Project . . . . . . Customizing Truss Parameters . . . . Modifying the Shape of a Truss . . . Creating a Custom Truss Family . . . Building a Truss with Drafting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 . 595 . 604 . 608 . 611 . 616

Chapter 19

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 . 626 . 636 . 643

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 . 648 . 657 . 660 . 662 . 665 . 665 . 667 . 670 . 672 . 673

Chapter 21

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

Chapter 22

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 . 694 . 701 . 705 . 709 . 713 . 714 . 717 . 721 . 726 . 727 . 730 . 732

Chapter 23

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

Contents | ix

Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 733 . 738 . 741 . 743 . 746 . 748 . 750 . 751 . 754 . 762 . 762 . 764 . 765

Chapter 24

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 . 769 . 777 . 781 . 784 . 784 . 787 . 790 . 790

x | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit® Structure 2009. You learn how Revit Structure works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface. This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Structure tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Structure works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

1

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Structure tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Structure project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Structure Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Structure. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Structure.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Structure projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Structure project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 3

10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Structure templates. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding structure type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select Structural Analysis-Default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Structure is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Structure is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Structure 2009?
The Revit Structure platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Structure model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Structure collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Structure parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Structure provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Structure: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Structure coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

Pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Structure keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Structure immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Structure uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating structural changes. The

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit Structure uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the structure. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, structural walls, slabs, ramps, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, column grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, structural walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the structural model. For example, beams, structural columns, and 3D rebar are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and symbols are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the structural model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Structure elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Structure. In Revit Structure, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding the Basics | 5

Understanding Revit Structure 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Structure are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. However, some terms are unique to Revit Structure. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit Structure, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the structural design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Structure makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, slabs, and beams. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the structure; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
South Elevation View of Structure

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit Structure parametric building elements to the design. Revit Structure classifies elements by categories, families, and types. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a structural design. For example, categories of model elements include columns and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, a truss could be considered one family, although the web supports that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include slabs, dimensions, roofs, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Structure predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a structural wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

click . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 7 . Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Structure is its ease of use. Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. A type can be a specific size of a family. In the following illustration. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Revit Structure uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. such as a 30” X 42” title block. The Revit Structure window is arranged to make navigation easy. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. This creates a new project based on the default template. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. In the steps that follow. The Title Bar 2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the structure (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). the user interface is labeled. you will soon feel comfortable learning this interface. A type can also be a style. specifically its clear user interface.Type: Each family can have several types.

Edit. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. While working in the drawing area. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. You then click the command name to run the command. The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. the Level 2 structural plan view is the default open view. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. There are 6 toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Menu Bar 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom. TIP For example. click Toolbar. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu.By default. the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZF. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. 8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . In addition. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. TIP The project template determines which view is opened and the view names as well.

the Type Selector displays a list of beams available within the project. click Structural Column. the beam type active in the Type Selector is the beam type that is added when you insert it into the structural model. 6 On the Design Bar. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Design Bar 10 On the Window menu. If you select the Beam tool. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. you can select any component and then change the type using the Type Selector. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. notice the list of columns that are available.The Options Bar 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice a beam type is specified. you can select a component type before you add it to the structural model. First. click Design Bars. click Structural Wall. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. if you intend to add a beam. You use the Type Selector in 2 ways. Within the drawing area. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the structural model. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains design options used to draw the structural wall. For example. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of beams. click Beam. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to beams. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 9 .

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab — commands for creating most basic structural model components View tab — commands for creating different views in the project Architectural tab — commands for adding architectural components to your project Drafting tab — commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab — commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab — commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab — commands for executing conceptual massing commands Modelling tab — all the commands to create structural model elements Construction tab — commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands within a tab. containing buttons grouped by function. 11 Click OK.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . click the tab. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the Menu Bar. There are 9 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. immediately below the Type Selector. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

In the Project Browser. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 11 . select Views (all).The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.

making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 3D). delete. and rename views. The browser is also dockable. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or .sign next to the name. and groups. elevations. To open a view. You can right-click in the browser to add. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (structural plans. family category (beams. families. 12 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts .You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. columns. families. walls). and group name. schedules. reports. 13 In the Type Selector. double-click the name. click Browser Organization. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project. 14 On the Settings menu. scroll through the sorting available for the Project Browser. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. sheets.

click Structural Wall. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. In this case. Navigating the Revit Structure User Interface | 13 . After you create a browser organization scheme. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. click Modify. click Cancel. In the bottom left corner of the window. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector.You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. 18 On the Design Bar. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point." TIP The cursor tooltip that displays is identical to the note on the Status Bar.

When you place the cursor over a component. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. find a keyword on the Index tab. The Status Bar also provides information. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. regarding selected components within a view. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. click . or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. and click to get the topic associated with the window. Click the Help button. Tooltips: To see tooltips. You can also press SHIFT+F1. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Structure Help window. There are several tools that help you find information. 20 Press TAB. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: Building Elevation. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Revit Structure Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Structure 2009 Help. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol so that it is highlighted. in conjunction with tooltips. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Dialog include Help buttons. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol at the bottom of the drawing area.You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure In this exercise. it will be easier to work in Revit Structure and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. press F1 to get help on that dialog. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can use this tri-pane. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. 14 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . After you are familiar with these tasks. In the Status Bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Structure session. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Structure tasks that are included in the tutorials. Windows: From any window. press SHIFT+F1. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. If there is no Help button displayed.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 15 . click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the structural model in the window. the view zooms out from the structural model. 3 In the Project Browser.Use zoom commands to adjust the view There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. In the drawing area. click 3DViews ➤ 3D. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the following steps. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or plan view in the view.rvt.

When you release the mouse button. The view of the structural model is sized to fit the available window. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 10 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 8 Click in the drawing area.6 On the View toolbar. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. To modify or add snap increments. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. the view zooms in on the selected area. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. 16 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. Revit Structure uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

select the second item in the list. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 18 On the Undo menu. click Settings menu ➤ Options. 16 To exit the wheel. 13 Click and hold the mouse button. and click the SteeringWheels tab. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 15 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. 14 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. moving the wheel to the desired location. press ESC. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Structure | 17 . For more information about SteeringWheels. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Undo commands 17 On the Standard toolbar. on the View toolbar. . To define settings for SteeringWheels. As you move the mouse. All changes you make to a project are tracked.11 To display SteeringWheels. Move. 12 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click Help. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. In this example.

The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 21 To end the command. click the Undo command. such as the Lines command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 22 Close the file without saving your changes. On the Design Bar. click Lines. or press CTRL+Z. End a command 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 18 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . Some commands. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Press ESC twice. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. and click again to end it.Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. 20 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

You will also learn some of the practices that can help you efficiently design and develop a structural project.Express Workshops 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit Structure 2009 functionality. You then add structural walls. columns. using the modelling tools provided in Revit Structure. you will have a basic understanding of both the Revit Structure design and documentation tools. beam systems. you create a 5-story steel structure. beams. you will create and name a new steel project. and a concrete slab to the model. 19 . Each tutorial demonstrates tools that you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common structural workflows. you copy the elements to multiple levels on the model. You start by linking a 2-dimensional architectural file into Revit Structure and using the drawing as a background template for grid and column locations. Creating a New Project In this first exercise. Structural Modelling In this lesson. When you finish these tutorials. Finally.

Add levels 1 In the Project Browser. click (Pick Lines).1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.rte. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. when a dashed line displays. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. 20 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and click Open. click Level. click OK. and double-click North. 6 Navigate to a folder of your preference. expand Elevations (Building Elevations). 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the Choose Template dialog. Adding New Levels on page 20. enter 12' 0". open the Imperial Templates folder. Save the new project 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. ■ ■ In the drawing area. and for Offset. Adding New Levels In this exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. On the Options Bar. click to create Level 3. 4 In the New Project dialog. 2 Click the value (10' 0") for the Level 2 elevation. select Structural Analysis-Default . click Browse. and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Modelling.rvt. you create additional levels for your structure. 3 Create additional levels as follows: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Level 2 reference line.rvt. enter 12' 0".

you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural drawing (DWG format) to use as a background for creating your structure. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 21 .4 Repeat the previous step to create 2 new levels (Level 4. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Importing/Linking a DWG File on page 21. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and Level 5). each with the offset value set to 12' 0". Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise. 5 Press ESC.

do the following: ■ In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. click symbol as shown. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Click Open. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can ignore the Revit Warning. For Colors. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. For Positioning. click Training Files.dwg. Reposition elevation symbols 4 On the View toolbar. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and select Imperial\i_RST_EW_Arch_floor_plan. Select Current view only.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Notice that Level 2 is bold. and draw a zoom box around the West elevation 22 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 3 In the Import/Link dialog. select Auto . This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and click in the drawing area to display the architectural file. (Zoom In). Import/Link an architectural file 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Center to Center. select Black and White.

Importing/Linking a DWG File | 23 . and click to place the symbol. click drawing. 9 In the drawing area. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 8 Select the imported drawing.5 Click the elevation symbol. and in the Import Instance Query dialog. select a single column. . 6 Use the same method to relocate the remaining elevation symbols. and on the Options Bar. drag it beyond the dimensions. click Query. Hide elements in the imported drawing 7 On the View toolbar. click Hide in View.

(Undo). 10 On the Toolbar. Place horizontal grids 1 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit). 5 Select the next horizontal grid line above grid line 1. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and a value of 1 appears within the grid bubble. click 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Column Grids on page 24.rvt. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. Notice that it is labeled 2. 24 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Grid. click .Notice that all columns disappear. Adding Column Grids In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the first horizontal grid line. you use the imported drawing as a background for creating both vertical and horizontal grids.

The last horizontal grid line is labeled 6. Adding Column Grids | 25 . 12 Click the value within the grid bubble. and press ENTER. Click the check box near the bubble (as shown) to turn the bubble display on or off.6 Select the remaining horizontal grid lines using the zoom controls as needed. and a value of 7 appears within the grid bubble. 10 On the Options Bar. Make sure that all the grid bubbles are displayed on the right side of the drawing. the bubble might display at the opposite end of the grid. 11 Select the first vertical grid line. NOTE When you select a grid line. Place vertical grids 8 Enter ZF. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter A. 7 On the Design Bar. click Grid. As you select subsequent grid lines. click . click Modify. Notice that the grid line is highlighted. labels display in numerical sequence.

Notice that the sequencing has changed from numeric to alphabetical. 19 Enter ZF. 17 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and then OK. 14 Select the remaining vertical grid lines. Change drawing visibility 16 Enter ZF. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Under Halftone.13 Select the next grid line to the right of grid A.dwg file. The last grid line is labeled G. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify. Click Apply. 15 On the Design Bar. select i_EW_RST_Arch_floor_plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click the Imported Categories tab. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing additional structural elements.

i_RST_EW_Modelling. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 2. you add structural walls around the elevator shafts located in the center of the structure. For the remainder of this tutorial.rvt. Adding Structural Walls on page 27.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Structural Walls | 27 . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Structural Walls In this exercise. Setup views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. this view is referred to as the plan view.

10 Using the drawing as a guide. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in he 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. The plan view and the 3D view are now displayed in separate windows in the drawing area. and place the first structural wall as shown. click the sketch line that represents the exterior face of the top elevator shaft. 4 Close any additional windows that may have been opened accidentally. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click center of the drawing. select Basic Wall : Generic . 9 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.8" Masonry. For the remainder of this tutorial. this view is referred to as the 3D view. 8 In the Type Selector. Place structural walls around the top elevator shaft 5 Click inside the plan view. select Finish Face: Exterior. click (3D). click . 6 On the View toolbar.2 On the View toolbar. 11 Click the north exterior face of the elevator shaft to place the second structural wall. click Structural Wall. and for Loc Line. .

15 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. place the remaining structural walls around the top elevator shaft. View the structural walls in 3D 14 Click inside the 3D view and enter ZF. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Adding Structural Walls | 29 . 13 On the Design Bar. and click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading w/Edges.12 Using the same method.

30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and using the architectural drawing as a guide. Mirror the west elevator shafts 17 Click inside the plan view. 18 Draw a selection box around all 3 elevator shafts.Complete the elevator shafts on the west side of the structure 16 Using the same method and wall type used to place the first elevator shaft walls. place structural walls for the middle and bottom elevator shafts on the west side of the structure.

(Mirror). The elevator shafts from the west side of the structure are now mirrored on the east side.19 On the Toolbar. click 20 Click grid D. Adding Structural Walls | 31 .

21 On the Design Bar. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify. These columns extend from Level 1 to Level 2. you add columns at specific grid intersections. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the completed elevator shafts are displayed in the 3D view. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Adding Structural Columns on page 32. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.

i_RST_EW_Modelling. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. place a column at the following grid locations: ■ ■ B6 A5. Place columns at specific grid intersections 1 Click inside the plan view. .rvt. 2 On the View toolbar. B5 Adding Structural Columns | 33 . 4 In the Type Selector. click structure. click Structural Column. 6 Using the same method. 5 Click grid location A6 to place the first column.Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column so that it is perpendicular with grid line 6 as shown. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43.

Place remaining columns using the grid intersection tool 8 Click inside the plan view. click Structural Column. and enter ZF. select W-Wide Flange-Column : W14X43. click Finish. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 Click inside the 3D view. and enter ZF. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 12 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click (Grid Intersection). 10 In the Type Selector. Columns are placed at each grid intersection. 13 On the Toolbar.

Add beams using the chain tool 1 Click inside the plan view. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 On the View toolbar.15 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. . Adding Structural Beams | 35 . click structure. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Chain. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. click Beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. Adding Structural Beams In this exercise. You also set the offset value of the steel beams to allow for the concrete slab that will be added in a later exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Structural Beams on page 35. you add structural beams to level 2 to form the steel framework of the structure.

Create sloped beams 9 Select the beam between grid locations A6 and B6. and then click to enter the beam startpoint. 7 Click the midpoint of the column at grid location B6 to specify the beam endpoint. and A6.6 Move the cursor over the column at grid location A6 until a triangle is displayed. and select the beam between A6 and A5. The triangle indicates the midpoint of the column. enter 5' 0". click the midpoints of the columns at grid locations B5. 10 Click the column at grid location A6. press CTRL. 8 Using the same method. that is. and press ENTER. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . place additional beams in the upper-left bay of the structure. A5.

NOTE The method used to create sloped beams is shown for demonstration purposes only. click .Notice the 3D view displays the sloped beams based on the new offset height. 16 Draw a selection box around the entire view to select all grid lines. and enter ZF. 15 On the Options Bar. click . 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. Add remaining beams using the grid intersection tool 12 Click inside the plan view. click Beam. This project does not require sloped beams. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 11 On the Toolbar. Adding Structural Beams | 37 .

and enter ZF. Beams are placed within the grid. 18 Click inside the 3D view. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice the beams are deleted in the 3D view. click through A5. 21 On the View toolbar. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . click Modify.17 On the Options Bar. click Finish. and press DELETE. Delete beams outside the drawing floor extents Six beams that were placed at grid locations outside of the floor extents of the architectural drawing need to be deleted. 20 Click inside the plan view. and draw a zoom box around the beams at grid locations A2 22 Select each beam.

click Beam. and draw a zoom box around the southeast side of the structure. delete the beams on grid locations G2 through G5. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. 25 On the View toolbar. click the intersection of the beam on grid line 2 and the centerline of the wall to establish the beam startpoint. between grid lines G2 and G5. 29 Click the beam on grid line 3 to establish the beam endpoint. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.23 Using the same method. Add new beams within the drawing floor extents The new beams are placed within the floor extents of the architectural drawing. 28 Using the architectural drawing as a guide. 27 In the Type Selector. 24 Click inside the plan view. click . Adding Structural Beams | 39 .

40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .30 Using the same method. place 2 additional beams between grid lines 3 and 5.

click . and on the Toolbar. 35 Select the beam between grid lines G5 and G6. and press DELETE. Adding Structural Beams | 41 . click . Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view. 34 On the View toolbar.31 Select the 3 new beams. 32 Select grid line A for the center of the mirror reflection. and draw a zoom box around the northeast stair shaft. Delete beams inside the northeast and southwest stair shafts 33 Click inside the plan view.

click . and press DELETE.36 On the View toolbar. and enter ZF. 38 Click inside the 3D view. 37 Select the beam between grid lines A1 and A2. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and draw a zoom box around the southwest stair shaft.

Add 3 beams above the elevator shaft walls These beams will support a beam system that is added in the next exercise. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the elevator shaft wall. This is the endpoint for the first beam. 44 Click the existing beam on grid line 3. 39 Click inside the plan view. 43 Click the existing beam on grid line 2. This is the startpoint for the first beam. Adding Structural Beams | 43 . select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. . click center of the structure. click Beam. 42 In the Type Selector. 40 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts located in the 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

48 Click the beam on grid line D . This is the endpoint for the second beam. This is the endpoint for the third beam. click . and on the Toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar. Mirror the elevator shaft beams 49 Select the 3 new beams. click Modify.45 Click the existing beam on grid line 4. 47 Click the second beam to establish the startpoint for the third beam. Use the architectural drawing to locate the outline of the outside wall of the elevator shaft. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Adding Structural Beams | 45 . Notice the new beams are displayed in the 3D view.50 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection. Set the beam offset value The offset value for all beams is lowered to accommodate the slab that will be added in a future exercise. 52 Draw a selection box around the entire model. 51 Click inside the 3D view.

Under Category. select Structural Framing (Girder). Only the structural framing elements (girders and joists) are highlighted. Click Apply. Under Category. Click OK. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . enter -0' 5". select Other. 55 On the Options Bar. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. select Structural Framing (Joist). Notice the beams have been lowered in the 3D view. under Constraints.53 On the Options Bar. 54 In the Filter dialog. For z-Direction Offset Value. click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: For z-Direction Justification. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). do the following: Click Check None. and then click OK.

click Beam System. Adding Structural Beam Systems In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the bays on the northeast side 6 Select the beam between grid locations A5 and A6 to set the beam system direction. Adding Structural Beam Systems on page 47. for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. select 3D. Adding Structural Beam Systems | 47 . 5 On the View toolbar. For Maximum Spacing. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. Automatically create multiple beam systems 1 Click inside the plan view. enter 9' 0". click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. select Maximum Spacing. For Beam Type. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter ZF. i_RST_EW_Modelling. 3 On the Options Bar. click of the structure.rvt. you add multiple structural beam systems to the steel frame on Level 2. Click OK. select W-Wide Flange : W12X26. .57 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

10 Click inside the 3D view. NOTE Some beam systems might include 2 beams based on the size of the bay. do not place a beam system in the bays for the stairs in the northwest and southeast corners of the structure. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the structure. 7 Click to place the beam system. and enter ZF. Also. Notice the beam system displays in the 3D view. 9 On the Design Bar. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Modify.The beam system location displays with a blue dashed line. 8 Using the same settings and method.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Structural Slab | 49 . You are now in sketch mode. You create the sketch lines for the left side of the slab. click Slab. you sketch a concrete slab on Level 2 by tracing the outside edge of the architectural drawing. Adding a Structural Slab In this exercise.rvt. and enter ZF. i_RST_EW_Modelling. and use the mirror tool to complete the sketch. click Lines. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Trace the architectural drawing floor plan 1 Click inside the plan view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding a Structural Slab on page 49. 3 On the Design Bar.

zoom in and out as needed. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . . When sketching the slab. If necessary. and draw a zoom box around the northwest corner of the 5 Click the edge of the floor outline to start the slab sketch. 8 Continue sketching the slab until you reach grid line D. use (Trim/Extend) on the Options Bar. click structure.4 On the View toolbar. and make sure there are no duplicate sketch lines. and DELETE to remove unwanted lines and to clean up line intersections. 6 Place the first sketch line along the exterior edge of the architectural drawing. 7 Continue sketching lines along the drawing perimeter using the exterior-most model lines of the imported drawing.

Adding a Structural Slab | 51 . 11 On the Toolbar. 10 Draw a selection box around the left half of the view to select all sketch lines.Use the mirror tool to copy the slab sketch 9 Enter ZF. click . 12 Select grid line D for the center of the mirror reflection.

16 On the Design Bar. 14 Enter ZF. click Lines. and draw a zoom box around the top of the slab sketch at grid 17 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. . click line D.13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Complete the slab sketch 15 On the View toolbar.

. and draw a zoom box around the bottom of the slab sketch at 20 Draw a single line to join the 2 halves of the slab sketch. . click grid line D. 22 On the View toolbar.18 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click Lines. click structure. and draw a zoom box around the southeast corner of the Adding a Structural Slab | 53 . 24 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Enter ZF.

click structure. 29 Modify the slab sketch until it appears as shown. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 Enter ZF. click Lines. 27 On the View toolbar. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . click Finish Sketch.25 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. . click Modify. and draw a zoom box around the northeast corner of the 30 Enter ZF.

Copying Elements to Multiple Levels on page 55.rvt. beam systems. and the slab from Level 2 to the remaining levels of the structure. beams. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. click No when asked if you would like walls that go up to this floor level to attach to its bottom. Notice the completed slab is displayed in the 3D view. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 55 . i_RST_EW_Modelling. you copy columns. 32 Click File menu ➤ Save.In the Revit dialog. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels In this exercise.

and then click OK. select Up to level: Level 5. 5 On the Options Bar. Under Category. . Click OK. Click Apply. click ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). do the following: Click Check None. and enter ZF. 4 In the Filter dialog. do the following: For Top Constraint.Extend the elevator shaft walls up to Level 5 1 Click inside the plan view. click ■ ■ 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . under Constraints. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice the elevator shaft walls are displayed in the 3D view. 2 Draw a selection box around the entire view. select Walls.

under Constraints. 13 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Copying Elements to Multiple Levels | 57 . 14 In the Select Levels dialog. 9 In the Filter dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. do the following: Click Check None. select Level 3. click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click OK. and then click OK.Extend columns up to Level 3 7 Click inside the plan view. click ■ ■ ■ 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 5. select Structural Columns. For Top Offset. Under Category. Notice the columns are extended to Level 3 in the 3D view. and then click OK. Copy columns up to Level 5 12 With the columns still selected. and draw a selection box around the entire view. 8 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . enter 4' 0". do the following: For Top Level. Notice the columns are extended to Level 5 in the 3D view. .

For Top Offset. click ■ ■ ■ . Under Category. do the following: Click Check None. and Structural Framing (Joist). while pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. Structural Framing (Girder). and draw a selection box around the entire structure. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. Structural Beam Systems. ■ 21 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 22 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. enter 4' 0". select Floors. and then click OK. 20 In the Filter dialog. Click Apply. 24 Enter ZF 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Change the top and bottom offset values 15 With the columns still selected. click ■ ■ . select Level 3 and Level 5. do the following: For Base Offset. under Constraints. 23 In the Select Levels dialog. enter 0' 0'. 19 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. click Modify. on the Options Bar. Copy remaining structural elements up to Level 5 18 Click inside the 3D view.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Foundations on page 59. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZF. Place isolated foundations under each column 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.rvt. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you add an isolated foundation under each structural column. and then you add a slab foundation under the elevator shafts. Adding Foundations | 59 . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_EW_Modelling. Adding Foundations In this exercise. under Structural Plans.

Notice the footings located between the elevator shaft walls. 4 In the Type Selector. select Footing-Rectangular : 72" x 48" x 18".3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The structural columns are now supported by isolated foundations. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shafts. All the structural columns are highlighted. 8 On the Design Bar. click (Structural Column). 6 Draw a selection box around the entire structure. 5 On the Options Bar. Delete 2 footings near the elevator shaft 9 On the View toolbar. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 7 On the Toolbar. click Finish. click .

for Type. (3D). click Foundation ➤ Slab. click Lines. click (Rectangle). and press DELETE. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Floor Properties. 12 On the Design Bar. The foundation is now displayed in 3-dimensions. and click OK.10 Select both footings. 16 Click above the upper-left corner of the elevator shaft walls and sketch the slab so it surrounds the walls and columns as shown. Place a slab foundation under the elevator shafts 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. select 12" Foundation Slab. Adding Foundations | 61 . You are now in sketch mode. click 19 Enter ZF.

Structural Detailing In this lesson. you place it in an existing project sheet. and modify its line properties. you create and annotate model-based details in a section view.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Next. 21 Proceed to the next lesson. you learn to import and modify an AutoCAD DWG file. incorporating its line styles within the Revit Structure workflow. 62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . You have completed the Structural Modelling Express Workshop tutorial. Structural Detailing on page 62. You then import detail views from a Revit detail library project and place them in a new sheet. Finally. You begin by importing an AutoCAD drawing as a reference section.

and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Free_Standing_Wall_Section. Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 7 to a line weight of 9. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Name the view Typical Wall Section. Map line weights to DWG/DXF color numbers 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Setting ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF.txt in the Data folder of the Revit Structure installation directory. click Training Files. 5 In the New Drafting View dialog. 2 In the Import Line Weights dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. ■ Click Save As. Create a new drafting view 4 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.Importing/Linking a DWG File In this exercise.rvt. do the following: ■ Select the Link option. and open \Imperial\i_RST_EW_Working_with_AutoCAD. Select a scale of 1/4”= 1'-0". you import and link a 2-dimensional (2D) architectural AutoCAD drawing (DWG format) to use as a detail reference in a sheet. You begin by setting Revit Structure to associate line weights to the DWG/DXF color numbers of the imported AutoCAD file. Click OK. click Training Files. but do not open it. 7 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Specify the DWG/DXF Color Number 4 to a line weight of 5. Importing/Linking a DWG File | 63 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg. 8 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 3 Save the Import Line Weight file as line. Import the DWG file 6 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

9 Enter ZF (Zoom to fit). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View on page 65. This is the project training file that is used for all remaining exercises in this tutorial. 11 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . and save the new project as i_RST_EW_Detailing. select Auto . For Positioning. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.■ ■ For Colors.rvt. Notice the imported detail is linked into the Typical Wall Section drafting view with the mapped line weights.Center to Center. select Black and White. ■ Click Open.

Create the section reference 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around grid locations A2 and A3. Notice that Level 1 is bold. Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View | 65 . 2 On the View toolbar.rvt. Select the Reference other view option. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select Drafting View: Typical Wall Selection. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans ➤ Level 1. you create a section that references an existing detail view.Using a Detail Drawing as a Section View In this exercise. click Section. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 4 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. click . select 1/4" = 1'-0". From the adjacent drop-down list of views. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.

66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. move the cursor down. and double-click S.Unnamed.rvt. Add the detail view to a sheet 1 Close all views except for Level 1.5 Click outside the wall between grid lines 2 and 3. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Placing a Detail in a Sheet on page 66. 3 Enter WT (Tile Windows). you place the imported detail view on an existing sheet.1. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing a Detail in a Sheet In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and click inside the north wall to place the section. expand select Sheets (all).

Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 67 . 4 On the View toolbar. 6 Release the mouse button. and draw a zoom box around the empty space to the right of 5 In the Project Browser.Sheet S-1 . expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).Unnamed and the Level 1 structural plan views are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. and drag Typical Wall Section onto the sheet view. click Level 1 on the sheet. .

8 Click to place the detail. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Notice the detail drawing outline. 7 Move the cursor to align the detail outline in the empty space of the sheet.

click corner of the sheet.0. change it to S-1. . and click ENTER. and draw a zoom box around the title block in the lower-right 10 Double-click the sheet number. Change the sheet number in the title block 9 On the View toolbar. Placing a Detail in a Sheet | 69 . notice the section callout has updated according to the detail and the sheet number.In the structural plan view of Level 1.

Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details In this exercise. notice the section callout has updated according to the new sheet number.In the structural plan view of Level 1. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details on page 70. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you change the line properties of the imported AutoCAD drawing to display differently in Revit Structure. i_RST_EW_Detailing. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Adjusting Line Weights of Imported Details | 71 . click . and double-click Typical Wall Section. 2 Click on the detail drawing.Determine the drawing layer of the line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click one of the lines representing the exterior surface of the wall cross-section. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 3 On the Options Bar.

8 Click the Imported Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 11 In the Line Graphics dialog. Change the weight of the line 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 Click OK.5 In the Import Instance Query dialog. 12 Click OK. 6 Click OK. 9 Click the CONT5 row. 13 Click Apply. notice the Layer value CONT5. select 4. 10 Click the Override button in the Lines column of the CONT5 row. for Weight. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library In this exercise. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library on page 73. 3 In the Insert Views dialog.TYPICAL CONCRETE FOOTING WITHOUT PIER OR PILASTER DETAIL Drafting View 007 .TYPICAL PLAN OF HORIZONTAL REINFORCING OF CONCRETE WALLS DETAIL Drafting View 009 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save.TYPICAL SLOPE BETWEEN FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 003 .Notice that all lines associated with the CONT5 layer are now set to a line weight of 4. Select the following views to insert: ■ ■ ■ Drafting View 001 . and select \Imperial\ i_RST_EW_Typ_slab_detail_library. do the following: ■ ■ For Views. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.TYPICAL CONCRETE WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK.rvt. Creating a New Details Sheet from a Detail Library | 73 .TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTINGS AT UTILITY OPENING DETAIL Drafting View 004 . 2 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. i_RST_EW_Detailing. click Training Files.TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL Drafting View 002 . Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you import multiple detail views and place them on a new project sheet. select Show all views and sheets.rvt. Import detail views from a Revit Structure detail library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. 7 Click OK. Add the detail views to a sheet 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Click to place the detail.4 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and drag 001 . 10 Move the cursor to position the detail outline on the sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).TYPICAL ELEVATION OF STEPPED WALL FOOTING DETAIL onto the sheet view. 74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Notice the imported details are listed In the Project Browser under Views (All) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) Create a new sheet 5 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 9 Release the mouse button. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK. 12 Use the same method to place the remaining views that were imported earlier in this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise. you create a section view and crop it so that it can be displayed side by side with a related structural plan. Prepare a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section on page 75. click .T.rvt.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 75 . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. and draw a zoom box around grid locations C1 and D1. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans.. double-click Level 3 .O. 2 On the View toolbar. and close all other views.S.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 4 On the Options Bar, for Scale, select 3/4" = 1'-0". 5 Click outside the wall, halfway between grid lines C and D, move the cursor to the right, and click inside the west wall to place the section.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Sections (Building Section), and double-click Section 1.

76 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

7 In the section view:

Locate the double-arrow control at the top of the crop area, and drag it down to just above the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Preparing Views for Detailing in a Section | 77

Click and drag the double-arrow control handle at the bottom of the crop area to just below the Level 3 - T.O.S. elevation line.

Click the double-arrow control handle to the left of the crop area, and drag it to the right to reduce white space.

78 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

8 On the View Control Bar:
■ ■

Click Click

(Hide Crop Region). (Detail Level: Fine).

9 On the View toolbar, click wall.

, and draw a zoom box around the beam connection, slab, and

10 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans, double-click Level 3 - T.O.S., and close all other views. 11 Enter WT. Level 3 - T.O.S. and Section 1 are now aligned horizontally in the drawing area. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Cantilever to a Slab on page 79.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab
In this exercise, you add a cantilever to the existing slab using section and plan views. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Select a slab and enter sketch mode 1 In the section view to the right, select the slab.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 79

Notice the slab is highlighted in the plan view to the left.

2 On the Options Bar, click 4 Click Open View.

.

3 In the Go to View dialog, select Structural Plan: Level 3 - T.O.S. Notice the plan view has entered sketch mode. Add the cantilever 5 In the plan view, while pressing CTRL, select the vertical and arc segments of the slab.

80 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

6 On the Option Bar, for Cantilevers : Concrete, enter -9", for Steel, enter -2". 7 Press ENTER to apply the setting. 8 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Notice that the cantilever now extends from the slab. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise, Coping Beam Connections on page 82.

Adding a Cantilever to a Slab | 81

Coping Beam Connections
In this exercise, you will cope a beam where it joins a perpendicular beam. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt. Extend the beam flush to the connection 1 In the section view, select the beam as shown.

2 Unpin the selected beam by clicking on the pin.

3 Drag the control at the left of the selected beam to the left so the end of the beam is flush to the center of the perpendicular beam, as shown.

82 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

4 On the Toolbar, click

(Coping).

5 Select the newly extended beam, as shown.

6 Select the perpendicular beam, as shown.

Coping Beam Connections | 83

Notice the beam is coped to the shape of the beam it joins.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Detail Components on page 84.

Adding Detail Components
In this exercise, you will add a shear connector, a structural angle, an expansion bolt, and an L-angle welded connection to the section view. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise, i_RST_EW_Detailing.rvt.

84 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

Add a shear connector 1 Close the Level 2 plan view, and maximize the Section 1 view. 2 On the View toolbar, click and slab. , and draw a zoom box around the top of the beam connection

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector, select Shear Connectors-Side : 3/4”. 5 Move the cursor to the top center of the beam as shown.

6 Click to place the shear connector.

Adding Detail Components | 85

Add a structural angle 7 In the Type Selector, select AISC Angle Shapes-Section : L8x6x7/16. 8 Move the cursor to the empty space below and to the right of the beam as shown.

9 Press the SPACEBAR once to rotate the angle 90° counterclockwise. 10 Click to place the angle. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 12 Select the angle.

86 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

13 Click the vertical flip control.

Adding Detail Components | 87

14 On the Toolbar, click

(Align).

15 Click the bottom segment of the beam, as shown.

88 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

16 Click the angle, and then click the lock for the alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 89

17 Click the interior segment of the exterior wall, as shown.

90 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops

18 Click the angle, and then click the lock for alignment.

Adding Detail Components | 91

20 In the Type Selector. 21 Move the cursor into the drawing area near the angle. 23 Align the bolt halfway along the left side of the angle. 92 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .Add an expansion bolt 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as shown. click Detail Component. select Expansion Bolts-Side : 3/4”. 22 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the bolt 180° counterclockwise.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Move). as shown. click Modify. Adding Detail Components | 93 .24 Click to place the bolt. 27 Click the center of the interior segment of the bolt head. 26 On the Toolbar.

as shown.28 Move the cursor to align with the outer segment of the angle. 94 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .

29 Click to move the bolt flush with the angle. Adding Detail Components | 95 .

Add an L-angle connection 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 32 Move the cursor into the drawing area to the right of the beam connection. click Detail Component. select L-Angle-Welded Connection-Elevation : L4x4x5/16. 31 In the Type Selector.

click (Align). as shown. 41 Click the right segment of the perpendicular beam. click Modify. 34 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. change the value for L to 10” 40 On the Toolbar. Adding Detail Components | 97 . 36 On the Options Bar. 39 Click on the L-angle and drag it to the middle of the beam. 42 Click the left segment of the L-angle. click 38 Click OK. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. and then click the lock for the alignment.33 Click to place the L-angle. . 35 Select the L-angle.

Add break lines 1 Enter ZF. i_RST_EW_Detailing. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing on page 98. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing In this final exercise.43 Click File menu ➤ Save 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the project training file saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 98 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . you will add break lines and annotation to the section view.

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall. 7 Press the SPACEBAR twice to rotate the break line 180° counterclockwise. as shown. 9 Move the cursor onto the slab. 5 Click to place the break line. to the right of the coping detail. Notice the white space beneath the break line and the continuation of the wall beyond it. 4 Move the cursor onto the exterior wall above the slab. click Detail Component 3 In the Type Selector. as shown. select Break Line. as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 99 . 8 Click to place the break line. below the structural angle and expansion bolt. The crop area for the section view will be adjusted later.

14 Select the crop region and adjust it as follows: Drag the bottom double-arrow control upward to obscure the wall below the break line. click ■ ■ (Show Crop Region). 100 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . 11 Click to place the break line. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Drag the right double-arrow control to the left to obscure the slab and beam to the right of the break line.10 Press the SPACEBAR 3 times to rotate the break line 270° counterclockwise. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Modify.

Click to finish the first leader segment. click Text. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right. 18 Click in the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. as shown. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). ■ Type STRUCTURAL SLAB (SEE PLAN). click Add annotation (Hide Crop Region). Click to finish the second leader segment. away from the text box. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 101 . and do the following: Click on the top segment of the slab. Move the cursor up and to the right.15 On the View Control Bar.

21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click to finish the second leader segment. 22 Click on the leader. 20 Click on the bottom segment of the beam and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and to the right. click Modify. 102 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops . Type STL BEAM (SEE PLAN). as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. click (Add Left Leader). Move the cursor to the right.19 Click the right drag handle and move it to the left to resize the text box. Click to finish the first leader segment.

as shown. Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 103 . 25 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box to the left to resize the box.24 Drag the dot control of the new leader down so that it meets the bottom segment of the beam.

as shown. away from the text box. click 32 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. Type L8X6X3/16 (LLH) x ‘1-0” LONG CLIPS 2 4’-0” O. click Text. 33 Click in the drawing area. Move the cursor down and to the right. EXPANSION ANCHORS. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the right. 29 Drag the dot control at the right of the text box and move it to the left to resize the box. 28 Click in the drawing area. Click to finish the second leader segment. Move the cursor to the left.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Type CMU WALL (SEE FOUND. 31 On the Options Bar. Click to finish the leader segment. Click to finish the first leader segment. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Right). ANCHORED TO WALL USING 2-3/4” DIA. and do the following: Click on the bottom segment of the structural angle. and do the following: Click on the exterior segment of the wall. (One Segment). click Text. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Two Segments). 104 | Chapter 2 Express Workshops .C. away from the text box. INFO). SECTIONS FOR REINF.

Adding Final Annotation and Detailing | 105 . 35 Click File menu ➤ Save You have completed the Structural Detailing Express Workshop.34 Drag the dot control at the left of the text box and move it to the right to resize the box. as shown.

106 .

they are not saved to project or template files. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Structure. 4 In the Options dialog. click Browse. Set graphics settings 1 Open Revit Structure. click Training Files. 107 .rte. and click OK. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Structure working environment. under Template file. you learn how to modify your Revit Structure 2009 working environment. 6 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. notification preferences. selection default options. journal cleanup options. 9 In the New Project dialog. which is independent of the project settings. click OK. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. and your username when using worksets. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. 7 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. In the first lesson. you create an office template. 8 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. you modify the system environment. 5 Under Colors. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. Finally. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. These settings control the graphics. 2 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. and set it as your default template. select Invert background color. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In the second lesson.

17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. click the value for Selection Color. Setting Options 25 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Settings. 108 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . select yellow. click Modify. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Click the General tab. 12 Under Colors. and click OK. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Save Reminder interval. select One hour. 24 When prompted to save. For Save to Central Reminder Interval. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area.rvt. click Structural Wall. click the Graphics tab. 20 On the Design Bar. click No. 15 Under Notifications. 13 In the Color dialog. select One hour. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog.10 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. click Training Files. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 16 Click OK. click Modify. 11 In the Options dialog. the elements causing the error display using this color. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. select None. When an error occurs. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 19 On the Design Bar. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. For Tooltip Assistance.

and click Open. 3 Under Default template file. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. and click Browse to select a template. These files are used primarily in the software support process. and the family template files. clear Invert background color. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog. Under Windows Username. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. the family libraries. TIP To view a template. 2 In the Options dialog. 7 In the Options dialog. 28 In the Options dialog. click Browse. click the File Locations tab. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. as well as the material and rendering libraries. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. you specify your default file locations. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Structure sessions. under Default path for family template files. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click Browse. Specifying File Locations | 109 . Under Journal File Cleanup. The path may vary depending on your operating system or where you installed Revit Structure.27 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. NOTE Revit Structure Journal files are normally found in C:\Program Files\Autodesk Revit Structure\Journals. Your login name displays by default. For Selection Color. If prompted. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. These settings control location of important Revit Structure files such as your default project template. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. ■ ■ 30 Click OK. select Red. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Structure session. you can start a new project with that template. Specifying File Locations on page 109. 31 Click File menu ➤ Close. 5 Under Default path for user files. do not save the changes. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click Cancel. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 29 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications.

and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. 12 Click in the Library Path column for My Library. centralized. structural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. and notice the list of library names. However. You can modify the existing library names and path. click Place. Each library path points Revit Structure to a folder of families or training files. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. NOTE When you are opening. or loading a Revit Structure file. saving.This path is set automatically during the installation process. and click on the right-side of the field. 8 Click Cancel. In the following illustration. (Add Library Path) that displays 110 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 10 Under Libraries. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane. click (Add Value). 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. such as in a large.

TIP The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog. 14 Under Library Name. and click OK. Specifying File Locations | 111 . 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. If you work in a large office. templates. 18 Click Cancel. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Load. 21 Under Libraries. Notice that Revit Structure navigates directly to the library path. and select it as the library path. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Structure Open. and Import dialogs. click the My Library icon. click My Library. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 22 Click (Remove Value) to delete the library. Save. select My Library. 20 Click the File Locations tab. 16 Click File menu ➤ Open.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Structure projects. 15 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

click Edit. click OK.23 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. 17 Click OK. 20 Under Settings. 9 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. Specifying Spelling Options on page 112. 4 Under Personal dictionary. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click Modify. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Text. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Structure. 3 Under Settings. 5 In the text editor. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 19 In the Options dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. click template. 11 In the Options dialog. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 14 Click in the drawing area. Click File menu ➤ Save. to open a new Revit Structure project using the default 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Spelling tab. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 22 In the text editor. 112 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit. click OK. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Click File menu ➤ Exit. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Delete sheetmtl-CU. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. do not save the changes. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 2 In the Options dialog. click Edit. click the Spelling tab. 12 On the Standard toolbar. If prompted.

click Browse. 4 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you modify snap settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Structure project. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you perform an action. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click Structural Wall. under Template file. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.25 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Imperial\i_Tutorial_Default. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. you modify snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can turn snap settings on and off. 2 In the New Project dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4'. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design.. Modifying Snap Settings on page 113. click Training Files. click OK. work with snapping turned off. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 7 Under Object Snaps. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 6 Under Dimension Snaps.rte. and enter 1. In this exercise. Revit Structure uses the largest increment that represents less than 2 mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings | 113 . click OK. For example.

10 Click in the center of the drawing area. 16 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click Modify. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . If it does not. it refers specifically to the dimension that appears while you are in the act of sketching. Notice that the dimension snaps at 4' increments. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 14 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. use the wheel button on your mouse. While sketching. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 13 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. This kind of dimension is called a listening dimension. Use snapping shortcut keys 15 On the Design Bar. and click Wall. The listening dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and to numerical keyboard entries. zoom out until it does so. 11 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 12 While sketching the wall. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that snapping is once again active. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1'. and move the cursor to the right. and move the cursor to the right. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

and select Concrete . 20 Move the cursor downward. You create and modify materials. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.. Modifying Project Settings | 115 . 2 Scroll down. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. 23 Click OK. 25 Proceed to the next lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. and do not save the file.Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. If you move the cursor along the wall. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and open Imperial\i_RST_Proj_Settings.Precast Concrete for Name. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. the midpoint. 22 Under Dimension Snaps. When a model component is loaded into a project. and delete the value 1". Modifying Project Settings on page 115. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. fill patterns. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This list includes all materials available for use on model components. click Training Files. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. and use it to complete the exercises.rvt. and specify the wall endpoint. save the project file with a unique name. annotations. 17 Enter SM. Finally. lines. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and object styles. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. and the wall edges. 3 Click (Duplicate). When you apply a material to a component. Using these options. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.

Custom for the new wall name.O.This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. click Edit/New. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 17 In the Type Selector. select Concrete-Precast for Name. 16 Press CTRL. 4 In the Duplicate Material dialog. enter Concrete . Fnd. 14 Click OK 3 times. 8 Click Duplicate. click Edit. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 6 Select the lower exterior wall. It is currently assigned the material Concrete Cast-in-place concrete. 15 Select the left foundation wall. Apply the new material 5 In the Project Browser. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. and click . click This is the material you created previously.Precast. 10 In the Value field for Structure. click Modify. 11 Click in the Material field for Layer 2. and select the remaining exterior walls. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. All of the exterior walls of this project are now changed to the new type. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and double-click T. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. In the steps that follow. The lower wall now uses the Concrete texture when you render it. 9 Enter Foundation . select Basic Wall: Foundation-Custom. 13 In the Materials dialog. 12 On the right side of the Material field. . and click OK. Wall.

Creating and Applying Materials | 117 . This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the material was defined. 21 In the drawing area. you create a pattern and apply it to this material. NOTE If you want to see the material in greater detail. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. Click Render. 20 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar.19 On the View Toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ For Quality Setting. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. click . draw a pick box around the entire 3D image. The rendering process begins. the material that you created is displayed. click Rendering dialog. Notice that the foundation walls are no longer gray and there is no material pattern applied in this view. and select Rendering. select Best. When it is finished. and drag a zoom box around the area you want to render. In the following exercise. zoom into the model. 22 In the Rendering dialog.

Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 7 Under Custom. expand Elevations. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. choose Model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. You can align. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. rotate. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 3 Under Pattern Type. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. click Custom. 5 Click New. and double-click West. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and move model patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 24 Close the Rendering dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. such as steel. i_Settings-in progress. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .23 On the Rendering dialog. click Import. and save the file as i_Settings-in progress. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Structure software. click Show Model. 26 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure.rvt. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Notice that a concrete surface model pattern is not available. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 118. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a new pattern and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. under Display. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the wall.

click in the Material field for Layer 2. 26 On the View Toolbar. to select a fill pattern. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RST 2009\Training. 9 Select Concrete_Surface. and click Open. 11 Enter Concrete Surface for Name. and click OK. click . select Model. under Pattern Type. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 23 In the Materials dialog. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog. 24 Click OK 3 times. Apply the concrete surface pattern 13 On the View Control Bar. 22 Select the Concrete Surface model pattern. select Model Graphics Style: Wireframe. 10 Under Custom. click Modify. 27 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears.TIP Typically. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click 20 Under Surface Pattern. 25 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Fill Patterns dialog. It is currently assigned the material Concrete-Precast. select Concrete and enter 30 for Import scale. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 119 . click OK. . click Edit/New. click . adjust your zoom settings as needed. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 On the right side of the Materials field. TIP If the pattern does not display. 17 In the Value field for Structure. This layer represents the exterior finish of the wall. 12 Click OK. click . click Edit. 16 In the Element Properties dialog.pat from the Common folder. 14 Select the wall.

29 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings.28 Click File menu ➤ Save. 2 On the keyboard. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple components of the same type. and double-click 3D. Controlling Object Styles on page 120. i_Settings-in progress. there are often multiple trusses within a project. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. use the shortcut keys ZF (Zoom to Fit) so the entire model fits in the drawing area. you can change the type properties center chase width of one truss and then apply the change to all trusses. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each truss.

and click OK. under Custom Colors. select Blue. Notice the line color is applied to the wall. expand Walls. 6 Under Category. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Hidden Line. click OK. double-click the Line Color field. 8 In the Color dialog. 7 Under the Walls category. click Model Graphics Style. click Show categories from all disciplines. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles | 121 .3 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 122. 5 In the Object Styles dialog.

8 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. There are 2 ways to apply the line style to the truss. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the truss appearance in a specific view. (example: plan view). expand Structural Framing. click Model Graphics Style. Apply the new line pattern 7 In the Project Browser. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. and select Web Joist. Fnd. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. You have created a new line pattern. Under Line Pattern.Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the truss in plan view. under Floor Plans. enter Truss for Name. Click OK.O. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. i_Settings-in progress. now you must apply it. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify the 3D view is active. You then create a new line style to represent underslab drainage. 10 In the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click New. Wall.rvt. double-click T. select Truss. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and click Hidden Line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

13 Click Override for Line Style Projection. expand Structural Framing. This overrides the appearance of the truss only in the current view. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 123 . 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 In the Select Line Style dialog. Select Truss for Line Pattern. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight. and select Web Joist for Visibility. Select Blue for Line Color.11 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 15 Click OK twice.

and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 19 Enter Underslab Drainage for Name. select Underslab Drainage. 25 In the Options Bar. click Lines. double-click T. 26 Draw 3 vertical lines.O. equally spaced as shown below. 21 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. specify the following: ■ ■ Click Click . move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the slab. Click . and click OK. . Slab. 20 For the Underslab Drainage category. click New.Create a new line style 16 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Line Styles dialog. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. under Modify Subcategories. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 24 Click outside the upper-left corner of the slab to begin the rectangle. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Click . 23 In the Options Bar. Select Red for Line Color. Enter 2' 0" for Offset. Click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select 6 for Line Weight Projection.

30 Click OK. click the default value for Units Format. and clear Underslab Drainage. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify the 3D View is active. click Duplicate. expand Lines. double-click Level 1. expand Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 125. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 34 Click OK. 28 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Model Categories tab. i_Settings-in progress. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice the underslab drainage lines appear in this view.27 On the View Toolbar. 31 In the Project Browser. Modifying Annotations | 125 . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. This turns off the visibility of the underslab drainage lines only in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click OK.rvt. under Floor Plans. 32 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You also load a new beam annotation symbol and apply it to show the beam instance number rather than the beam type number. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 5 Under Text. click . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings.Imperial for name. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Enter Linear . and clear Underslab Drainage. 29 On the Model Categories tab.

The remaining untagged beams are tagged. click Structural Framing Tag. click Tag All Not Tagged. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Wall. Structural Framing Tag. verify that Create is clear. and open Imperial\Structural Framing Tag. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Category. 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. notice that there is a Linear . Load a new beam tag 10 In the Project Browser. notice the structural framing tag appears twice. Fnd. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. A beam instance tag displays on the selected beam. scroll to Structural Framing Tag and notice that Structural Framing Tag is now the assigned tag.6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Tag ➤ By Category. 19 On the Design Bar. 12 Click Load. 13 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Dimension. 16 Click OK. Notice that you can choose between the 2 beam tag types loaded into this project. Each tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 20 Select the structural framing tag category with the loaded tag. double-click T. In the Type Selector.O. . click Modify.Imperial dimension available. This tag is used when tagging using the Beams By Category option. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 22 On the View Toolbar. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Tags dialog. You have created a new dimension style. 18 Click a beam. click Training Files. 7 Click OK twice. 21 Under Leader. click 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.rfa. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the other displays the instance value. 15 Under Loaded Tags.

click the default value for Format. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 6 Click OK. under Length. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. In this table. select To the nearest 1/16" for Rounding. you modify the temporary dimension settings. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. Specifying Units of Measurement. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units.unless there is an override. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. and Detail Level Options on page 127. dimension values display using this setting. select Openings. click . Unless there is an override. You do not select a view scale to move it.rvt. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. and Detail Level Options | 127 . Temporary Dimensions. 8 Under Walls. you modify the detail level assignments. 12 Click OK. select Centerlines 9 Under Doors and Windows. under Area. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. 4 In the Project Units dialog. temporary dimensions now snap to the centerline faces and to the openings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. In the first section. and click OK. 2 In the Project Units dialog. you specify the project units of measurement . select 0 decimal places for Rounding.24 Proceed to the next exercise. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select SF for Unit suffix. 5 In the Format dialog. and click OK. In the final section. In the second section. i_Settings-in progress.Temporary Dimensions. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. Notice the 1/4" = 1' 0" view scale moved to the Medium column. In this project. Specifying Units of Measurement. dimensions use these project settings. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click the default value for Format.

NOTE In this exercise. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 128.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables.13 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Completed Project. expand Sheets (all). These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Revit Structure project files do not include ceiling plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. In this exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you open a project that was created using Revit Architecture to better demonstrate different phases of construction. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number.

and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural category of views. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 129 . and click New. notice that views are grouped based on phase. 8 Select Phase. select Discipline. expand Complete ➤ 3D Views and then expand Architectural and Structural. click the Folders tab. 5 On the Views tab. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog. and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click OK. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand each view type.■ Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Click the Views tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. under Sheets. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. 12 Click the Sheets tab. expand each sheet set. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. under Views. select Type/Discipline. On the Project Browser. and click Apply.

A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and Discipline. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project.rte template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. and click Open. when you create a new project. enter a unique file name. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. the same rules apply. When you create new projects. Depending on your needs. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Type. 5 Click OK. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Browse. such as structural or construction. Other than the default template. In this lesson. The first step in creating your structural template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. 2 Under Template File. If your work requires a variety of templates. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . levels. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. Although Revit Structure provides many templates to choose from.Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. In the lesson that follows. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. If you want to save this file. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. 3 Select the Structural Analysis-Default. navigate to your preferred directory. Creating a Structural Template In this lesson. expand Views ➤ Elevations. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and rendered scenes in a template. 6 In the Project Browser. you select the starting point for your structural template. select Project for Create new. you create a Revit Structure template file and set it as your default template. named print settings. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 4 In the New Project dialog. It is mostly conceptual and is designed as a road map with options for your consideration. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Whenever you create a new project or template. each is modified in a way to make it useful to a particular industry. When you create a new template based on an existing template. choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. dimensions styles. and view names. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. For example. and double-click Building Elevation. you create an office template. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your structural template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. preloaded families. and click OK.

there are additional commands on the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 8 In the Project Browser. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. For example.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you can select it now. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 13 Click Open. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . click Browse. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. When you create the material. If you want to use a template other than the default. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization View direction In addition to the list above. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. 11 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings on page 131. you can dictate its appearance in all views and renderings. select Project Template. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. you modify the project settings for your new template. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. in the drawing area. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. Other templates. If you have additional projects open. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. drag a zoom region around the level heads. and click OK. 14 Under Create New. 12 Select a default template. close them. Notice that the structural analysis template is more complex than the default template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. weights. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. such as the structural template. In this exercise.

3 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialogs. Create and modify fill patterns 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. You can add and delete view scales. For more details on modifying these settings. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 2 Scroll down the Name list. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings on page 115 for more information on creating new fill patterns. line patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. In the Object Styles dialog. specific modifications are not dictated. 14 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 6 Create new fill patterns as needed. and move model patterns. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. there are 3 tabs: one for model component line styles. In the dialog. Observe the materials that are already defined. line colors. or modify existing patterns. see the previous lesson. and create new subcategories as needed. Specify object styles 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.During this exercise. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 5 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 9 Click the Model Objects tab. one for perspective model line styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. You can align. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. such as beams and columns in orthographic views. 13 Modify categories. TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of structural components. 11 If necessary. Modify line weights 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a structure. 12 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 10 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. and scroll through the list of categories. create and modify them as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. rotate. create new subcategories. Modifying System Settings on page 107. 7 Click OK when finished. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can set line weights. or refer to the Help documentation.

The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 42 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. Modify Dimension Styles 39 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select it from this list. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and click Edit. and radial dimensions are modified separately. click Duplicate. 28 Click OK. 17 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it. click Duplicate. Linear. or line pattern as needed. 27 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 20 Modify existing line weights as needed. 21 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. Modify arrowheads 33 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. tags.The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects in perspective views. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 31 If necessary. 26 To modify a line pattern. name the style. name the style. modify the line weight. and specify the properties. 19 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 18 Add and delete view scales as needed. line color. 35 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 37 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. Modify line patterns 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. To see the details of a particular style. 30 For existing line categories. 40 Select the Type drop-down list. 41 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 32 Click OK. 34 Select the Type drop-down list. 16 Click the Model Line Weights tab. To see the details of a particular style. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 23 Click OK. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 25 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 43 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. Modify line styles 29 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and specify the properties. and dimensions. 38 Click OK. select it from this list. create new line subcategories using line weights and line patterns previously modified or created. such as section lines and dimension lines. 36 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . angular. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles.

and Angle settings. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. click Load. 55 Specify the Slope option. 52 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and click OK. or Fine. 60 Click OK. Specify detail levels 61 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. For example. and choose a decimal symbol. The detail level is based on view scale. when you add a structural framing tag with the tag option selected. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. TIP In the drawing area. Using the arrows between the columns. 58 Under Walls. click Format. 51 Under Length. 56 Click OK. 48 To load new annotation tags. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. 49 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 62 Review the table. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 47 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. In the Tags dialog. Specify temporary dimensions 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. When you create a new view. Medium. Modify loaded tags 46 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 59 Under Doors and Windows. Specify project units 50 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 45 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. Volume. and move view scales as needed. 53 Click OK.44 Click OK. the beam is tagged using the tag assigned to the structural framing category in this dialog. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 54 Repeat the previous 2 steps for the Area. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag.

To move the view scales. 68 Click the Sheets tab. Modify project browser organization 64 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Rename. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . or from the roof looking down (down direction). right-click any plan view of the Structural Plan Family. This parameter makes it possible for you to select a different view direction. click the Views tab. click Edit/New. or Edit existing organization types. create new browser organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. For example. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating the lengthy Project Browser list is cumbersome.NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. In certain projects. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 If necessary. 69 Delete. Setting View Direction 72 In the Project Browser. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. create new browser organization types. 65 In the Browser Organization dialog. engineers view plans using different orientations in different countries. 66 Delete. In a typical project. you can view the project from the slab looking up (up direction). In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 Click OK. or Edit existing organization types. and select Properties. 70 If necessary. click View Direction. click the arrows between columns. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 63 Click OK. Rename.

and make modifications in each area as necessary. This could be useful for things such as title blocks. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. Use the table below as a checklist. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . However. For example. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144. You can find additional information in Help. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Each command is available on the Settings menu.75 Use the down arrow to change the parameters to Up or Down. 76 Click OK to exit the dialogs. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. Links to associated tutorials are provided. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. In such a case. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Additional project settings 77 On the Settings menu. View Templates Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. If necessary. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. and framing tags. you can save rendered scene settings to a template.

If this selection is satisfactory. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Use the instructions in the table below to perform these steps. select Edit/New. You can load any family or group into a template. you could load detail components. or load a new beam type. If necessary. In the steps that follow. click Beam. and click OK. Obviously. and click OK. See Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. For example. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties to modify or add a new type. You may want to modify slab types to add a more diverse selection within the template. and on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Edit/New. or use the Project Browser to delete an existing type. In addition. Goal: Load new beam type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. notice the list of beams is already loaded. Navigate to the directory containing the beam type. you can move onto the next component type. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. For example. select Load. if you loaded every beam type you could find. and click Open. and click OK. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 To modify. modify. Modify type properties. you can set the symbolic representation settings for cutback distance. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Click Duplicate. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 137. Modify beam type Create new beam type Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 137 . Depending on the intended use of this template. you may want to delete. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select it. In the Element Properties dialog. Make modifications. brace symbols. enter a name. or add to this selection. you do both. Although the options are endless. create. there are some important thoughts to consider. However. and beams. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of beams every time you changed a beam within a project.Settings Menu Command Structural Settings Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. In the Element Properties dialog. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. do so before starting this exercise. and column symbols. click on the Options Bar. titleblocks. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. 78 Proceed to the next exercise. Although this is possible.

Press ESC twice to return to the template.4 Click OK. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. Notice that each family category is listed. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. load. and click Delete. Loading from the library is quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Notice it has Revit in the upper-right corner. create. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 12 Click OK. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded.) 9 Expand the titleblock. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 139. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Families. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. 11 To load a titleblock. and select the titleblock type. To do so. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. right-click the component. click Load. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Preview. This titleblock is currently part of the template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.

and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 4 If necessary. TIP To select the view template directly from the Project Browser. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. 3 Specify each value as needed. you can apply a view template to any view. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. you save time and increase consistency. In this exercise. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. and double-click Level 1. Detail Level. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control the initial appearance of the views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 139 . 2 For Name. right-click. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. You can also apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. select the view. Discipline. you created new projects using different templates. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. expand Views ➤ Structural Plans. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In addition. In this exercise. 6 Click OK.Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. and select Apply View Template. View Range. you will first modify view templates. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. rename or duplicate the view template. select Structural Framing Plan. At any time. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. and make modifications. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you create the views required for your template.

21 In the Options Bar. 14 Select the Structural Plan template. under 3D Views. review the Structural plans and elevations. Notice the level names have blue titles for the associated plan views. 11 Click Apply. Make sure you are still in the Level 2 view. 20 To add additional levels to the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. When the view template is applied the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 23 Rename and reposition the level as needed. Create 3D views 25 To add 3D views to the template. 22 Add the new level within the elevation view. 28 Rename the 3D View. 15 If you modified any other view templates. 19 In the Project Browser. You can rename this view. under Structural Plans. if desired. expand 3D Views. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. click Level on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. nor is there a limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. The associated floor plan will use the Structural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and press Ctrl while selecting additional views. duplicate. on the View toolbar. 27 In the Project Browser. After the template is applied. click 26 In the Project Browser. duplicate. This option means that every time a new plan view is created. open the view from the Project Browser. 24 Create additional levels as needed. the view is not linked to the template in any way. click Apply. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. right-click {3D}. You can also duplicate or delete the view. and select Rename. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Then right-click and select Apply View Template. select Make Plan View. Rename. Create and modify views 16 In the Project Browser. TIP To apply the template to multiple views. select the view in the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. double-click Level 2. or delete this view. under Floor Plans.Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. and click OK. under Elevations. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and notice the context menu includes options to rename. To do so. Black levels have no associated views. double-click Building Elevation. review the existing floor plans. this view template will be used to set the initial view properties. If necessary. 9 Select the Structural Framing Plan template. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Level 1. or delete them as needed. and apply the appropriate template.

Modifying Views and View Templates | 141 .29 To create additional 3D views. and click OK. modify settings. you can modify the Steering Wheel visibility and appearance. assign filters. click . Save the view 32 To save the view. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. The Steering Wheel is displayed in the drawing area. You may want to add schedules to a template. click Schedule/Quantities. select the category type. 34 If you want to add schedules to your template. supply a view name. On the Filter tab. 31 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View icon and select Options. and click OK. This tool provides freeform navigation for exterior and interior viewing. select and order required fields. Using this dialog. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views ➤ 3D Views. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. on the View toolbar. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and modify their properties accordingly. click Dynamically Modify Views 30 On the View toolbar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click . Create and modify schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click the Symbolic Representation Settings tab. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. You may want to add symbolic settings to a template. 37 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. select the default titleblock. modify settings. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. select one. 36 Click OK. 39 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Create custom symbolic representations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. After the sheet is created.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. beams. To do so. This can save time and ensure office standards are maintained. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. You can still add views to the sheet. Modifying Structural Settings on page 142. 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Structural Settings You can create custom cutback distances for braces. 40 To rename or renumber the sheet. and columns. and click OK. click Sheet. You can also create custom brace symbols for use in plan views and for parallel line offset distances. or on the sheet itself. If you have already loaded your titleblocks into the template. select the titleblock and delete it. and modify their properties accordingly. double-click the sheet number. and click Rename. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. 41 Create new sheets as needed. On the Appearance tab. You may want to consider adding the settings that you use most often. and click OK. You are prompted to select a titleblock. Add sheets to the template 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. modify settings. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Modifying Import/Export Settings | 143 . ■ 5 Click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Symbolic column cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the column to the beam endpoint. and are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program.3 Under General. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. ■ 4 Under Brace Symbols. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. When you import a DWG or DXF file. specify the desired line representation and offset as follows: ■ Plan representation: Select the desired symbolic line type for plan representation (Line or Line with Angle.) Parallel line offset: Enter the symbolic distance for the parallel line offset. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. The Export Layers command maps Revit Structure categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 143. enter the desired values for the following cutback distances: ■ Symbolic brace/beam cutback distance: Sets the distance from the center of the brace/beam to the center of the adjoining beam. Revit Structure presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.txt).

you could use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight (values from 1 . The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Structure program installation directory. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. they become the set mappings for the project. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. name the file. and so on. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Structure line weight. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. For example. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Multi-Category Tags employ shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. click Save As. 5 For each category. and click Save. Using shared parameters. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 144.16). and unlike shared parameters. project parameters. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. therefore. These settings are retained within the project template. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. name the file. Project parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 9 Click Save As. 8 In the dialog. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you refine the template further by setting up shared parameters. for example.txt) for MicroStation. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template.2 For each category. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. When you save these mappings to a text file. windows. name the file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and click Save. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. When you import a DWG or DXF file. They cannot be shared with other projects. and click Save. click Save As. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayersdgn. When you create a multi-category schedule. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. doors. they cannot be used to tag objects.

you can create a list of parameters. and select a shared parameter. 9 Name the parameter. This allows you to name the external parameter file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 3 Name and save the file. detailed instructions are not supplied because each office has a unique set of needs. click New. you can skip this exercise and move on to the last exercise of this lesson. 18 Under Type. 16 Under Name. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 14 Click Add. select Project parameter. click New. 19 Specify whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 6 Create as many groups as needed. you can begin creating parameter groups. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 7 Under Parameter group. you may want to save the file to a network location. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. enter a parameter name. and click OK when finished. select a parameter discipline type. 17 Under Discipline. 10 Click OK. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 2 Click Create. 25 Click OK. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. select a parameter value type. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 11 For each parameter group. select a group to which you want to add parameters. 5 Enter the group name. and specify the Type. 20 Select the element categories to which this parameter applies. under Groups. If a file already exists. 8 Under Parameters. click Add. 27 Click OK. 21 Click OK. add required parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 23 To add a shared project parameter. After the file is named. and specify the categories to which this parameter applies. and select Shared Parameter. Creating Named Print Settings. 26 Specify whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. 24 Click Select. and click OK. For each parameter group. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 145 .In this exercise. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.

click Schedule/Quantities. 2 Under Name. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. Creating Named Print Settings on page 146. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. The tag is now part of the template. click OK. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 30 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click OK. make minor modifications if necessary. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. This can be beneficial if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and click Open. paper placement. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. and the percent of actual size. you need only select a setting. For each printer. and add them to your default template file. 31 Navigate to the directory that contains the tag you want to load. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 34 Under Name. select the tag. You can also create named settings for printing to a DWF writer. Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can load them into the template. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. or consult the Help documentation. By creating named settings within the template. you create named print settings. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 36 When you have completed the schedule. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are included under Available fields.For information on creating multi-category tags. and print. enter a name for the schedule.

click New. 5 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings | 147 . click Setup. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and create additional settings as needed. 4 Click Save As. 6 Modify the printer settings. enter a name for the print setting and click OK.3 Under Settings.

19 Click OK. If you need to share this file with others. Your template is complete. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. select it. click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. click Browse. The only remaining task is to save it. 17 Select Browse. 23 Navigate to the template location. You can also set this template as your default template. TIP Another way to create a template is to delete all model geometries from an existing project. and click Open. and saved them to a template. 24 Click OK. 10 Repeat these steps as needed.9 In the Print dialog. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. This can provide a good starting point for a template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF writer. 18 Select the template. In this lesson. Set the template as your default template file 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. loaded components. 14 Under Save as type. 21 Click the File Locations tab. By investing the time to individualize your template. 11 Click OK when finished. you should save it to a network path. select a different printer. you modified settings. and click Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. click Setup. In addition. and create new settings for this printer. Use the template 16 To use the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. select Template Files (*. and save it as a template file. 15 Name the template. you help ensure the office standards are maintained and reduce repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 22 Next to Default template file. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .rte).

click Training Files. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. by importing or linking an existing Autodesk architectural project created in AutoCAD. AutoCAD Architecture. Notice that Level 2 is bold. click Training Files. In the next tutorial Creating a Structural Model on page 161. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Importing/Linking a 2D AutoCAD File In this lesson. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. and Revit Architecture. select Views (all) ➤ Structural Plans. you learn how to import or link a 2-dimensional (2D) drawing created in AutoCAD for use as a background. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1.dwg. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ Select Link and Current view only. NOTE For training purposes.rvt. Importing/Linking Drawing Files In this lesson.Starting a New Project 4 In this tutorial you begin your structural model in Revit Structure 2009. The imported file is used as a background template for creating the structural elements of the model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and select Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Level2. you learn how to import or link to files from different drawing programs. 149 .

and rotate the view as one object. click the imported/linked file. However. paste. select Auto . stairs and elevator opening symbols. select Black and White. drag. The file becomes view specific and will behave like an annotation. Selecting Link (instead of import) allows you to view. Click Open. click drawing area.NOTE Selecting Current View Only prevents the DWG file from appearing in all views. 6 On the Options toolbar. copy. ■ ■ ■ For Colors. Exterior facade outlines. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. For Positioning.Center to Center. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 150 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . you cannot select individual elements in the linked model. 5 In the drawing area.

Bind all external reference files (xrefs) to make the architectural data visible to the engineer after export. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. Notice that Level 2 is bold. In the Xref Manager dialog.dwg. In the next tutorial. Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 151 . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Imperial\i_RST_Import_ADT. some structural columns were added to the model at off-grid locations in conjunction with architectural columns. and select the latest available format. and expand Structural Plans. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Before exporting the file from AutoCAD Architecture. you use these columns to complete the structural framing. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. select Export to AutoCAD. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Structural Model on page 161. ■ Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. a new training file is supplied. select the Imported Categories tab.7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_1. and click OK. 9 Select Halftone for the value of i_STR_CSM_Level2.dwg. In the next tutorial. NOTE For training purposes. You can save the open file if you wish. On the File menu.rvt. click Training Files. expand Views (all). select each file and select Insert for Bind Type. you learn how to import a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in AutoCAD Architecture for use as a background. the file should be prepared as follows: ■ ■ Proxy graphics should be enabled by setting the system variable to 1.

For Positioning. select Auto . to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Exterior facade outlines. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. click Revit Structure drawing area. select Invert. click the imported/linked file. and elevator opening symbols. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. Click Open.4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Colors. 6 On the Options toolbar. click the Imported Categories tab. 5 In the drawing area. 152 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .Origin to Origin. stairs.

click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. 12 On the Options toolbar.dwg. and click OK. 11 In the drawing area. do the following: ■ ■ . 10 On the View toolbar. The halftone of the imported drawing is used as a background for placing columns. 13 Select any column. and on the Option Bar.9 Select Halftone for the value of i_RST_Import_ADT. click Partial Explode. Under Constraints. click the linked file. click . Importing /Linking an AutoCAD Architecture File | 153 . enter -1' 0' for Base Offset.

click Training Files. 5 In the Add Link dialog. select a template file. Linking a Revit Architecture File In this exercise.Origin to Origin. 15 Close the Element Properties dialog. Open a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can save the open file if desired. 154 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Creating a Structural Model on page 161. Notice that Level 2 is bold. you learn how to link to a 3-dimensional (3D) drawing created in Revit Architecture for use as a background. a new training file is supplied. You can copy grids. levels. for Positioning. and floors from the original design and monitor any changes made to those elements.Notice the column adjusts to the change. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 Click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. This is the active view that displays in the drawing area. You also learn how to use the Copy/Monitor feature to provide project coordination between architects and structural engineers. Link a Revit Architecture file 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. and open Imperial\i_STR_CSM_Revit.rvt. columns. 4 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. select Project under Create New. and click OK. select Auto . walls. In the next tutorial.

7 Enter ZF. and a few basic interior walls and doors display in the view. click Revit Structure drawing area. 11 Click the imported Revit drawing. 9 On the Options toolbar. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 8 In the drawing area. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 155 . click Options. stairs and elevator opening symbols.Exterior facade outlines. The Design Bar changes to Copy/Monitor mode Set options 12 On the Design Bar. to pin the drawing so that it cannot be moved within the 10 Click Tools menu ➤ Copy/Monitor ➤ Select Link. click the linked file.

Copy grids 16 In the Project Browser. click the Columns tab. select Level 2. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. On each tab the Original Type column identifies the type for the Revit Architecture file. When finished. Grids. To select more than one grid. Elements available for monitoring are separated into 5 categories (Levels. 18 Click the grid to be copied/monitored. columns need to be split at each level. and the New Type for the corresponding element available in the template selected. under Structural Plans. you can exclude element types you do not want to copy. click OK to close the Copy/Monitor Options Dialog. Columns. and while pressing CTRL. Walls. 13 In the Copy/Monitor Options dialog.The Copy/Monitor Options dialog opens. 156 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Each tab provides various parameters that can be set for that specific element. select Split Columns by Levels. and Floors). A column may span from level 1 to level 10 of a structure and may present a problem when the analytical model is generated. under Additional Copy Parameters. 15 Set the other parameter as desired. make selections. 14 In the Columns dialog. 17 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. Also. click Copy. Therefore. NOTE Architectural columns typically extend through multiple layers of a model.

and select each level. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. 20 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. click Copy. click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click Building Elevation. and that the type from the new project will be used. To select more than one level. After you select the grid. 21 Click the level to be copied/monitored.NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. Linking a Revit Architecture File | 157 . The warning can be ignored. press CTRL. and that the type from the new project will be used. click OK. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. Copying levels 19 In the Project Browser.

an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. click . After selecting each element. 25 On the Design bar. Copy structural walls. The warning can be ignored. click OK. click Multiple on the Options toolbar. 23 On the Copy/Monitor Design Bar. floors. press CTRL. click Finish Mode. under Structural Plans. and select each element. and that the type from the new project will be used. an eyeball symbol is displayed to indicate a relationship with the original element. and on the Options Bar.After you select each level. 24 Click the structural elements to be copied/monitored. To select more than one element. NOTE If you are prompted that the element type already exists in the project. The warning can be ignored. select Level 1. and columns 22 In the Project Browser. NOTE A warning message may indicate that the loaded type has been renamed. click Copy. Change the structural usage of the copied elements 26 Select a structural wall to be copied/monitored. 158 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project .

The link will not follow the host if it becomes linked into another file. select Bearing for Structural Usage. so that Revit Structure will enable the analytical projection plane feature for those elements. the structural usage parameter must be changed in the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. click . 31 In the Manage Links dialog. NOTE For all copied/monitored structural walls. and click OK. and click OK. and on the Option Bar. 32 In the Manage Links dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. check the value for Structural. and floors. ■ Linking a Revit Architecture File | 159 . 28 Select a floor to be copied/monitored. Select Attachment to make a link visible when its host document is linked into another file. click Reference Type. Links will appear in the file they are linked into. Manage links 30 Click File menu ➤ Manage Links. columns. ■ Select Overlay. click the Revit tab. The linked Revit file is displayed.27 In the Element Properties dialog.

In a later tutorial.33 Click File menu ➤ Close. the updated Revit Architecture file is reloaded into Revit Structure. 160 | Chapter 4 Starting a New Project . Project Coordination on page 461. In the next tutorial. NOTE All copied elements are monitored for possible changes. The coordination monitor function provides notification that updates have occurred. You can save the open file if you wish. 34 Proceed to the next tutorial. a new training file is supplied. Creating a Structural Model on page 161.

and then copy this framing to other levels. After you copy columns. 161 . you create a structural model using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009.Creating a Structural Model 5 In this chapter. You copy columns and use the paste-align command to add structure to other levels. you add horizontal framing to an area of Level 2. Creating a Structural Model In this lesson. You also learn how to splice the columns. you begin by adding columns from Ground Level to Level 2.

and enter A.rvt. click structural model. click Training Files. click Grid. 4 Select the left vertical grid line. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Grids. 162 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . which you use as a background drawing for placing columns. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice the grid line is highlighted with a blue value within the grid head. 5 Click the value in the grid head. click . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the imported drawing is a halftone. 3 On the Options Bar.Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing In this exercise. . 1 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Select the next vertical grid line to the right of grid line A. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 163 . Zoom in and out as needed. they are labelled in alphabetical sequence. Notice it is grid L. 7 Select the remaining vertical grid lines moving from left to right. 8 When you get to grid I. 9 On the View toolbar. click structural model. Notice it is labeled B.As you select subsequent grid lines. and draw a zoom region around the upper-right corner of the 10 Select the upper horizontal grid line. change the value to J. The last vertical grid is K. .

Notice that the sequencing has adjusted from alphabetical to numeric. 13 Select the remaining 3 horizontal grids. 14 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the column to select the arc start point. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 164 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Grid. 12 Select the next grid line below grid 1. 18 On the Options Bar. The bottom grid should be grid 5. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. click . and enter 1 for the new value. Draw a grid using the arc tool 15 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit).11 Click the blue value within the grid line L head. click .

20 Click the column to select the arc endpoint. Adding Grid Lines to the Imported Drawing | 165 . 21 Click the column to set the arc radius.

and select the grid.22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 166 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Extend grid 23 Drag the arc start point approximately as shown. 24 Drag the arc endpoint approximately as shown.

The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Structural Columns on page 167. These columns extend from an elevation to a splice elevation just above Level 2. you load a new column type from the Revit Structure Library and add columns at each grid intersection. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Adding Structural Columns | 167 .25 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Columns.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. To save changes. Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Place columns at grid intersections 1 Enter ZF.

5 Select the entire grid by drawing a pick box around it. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE When you use the Grid Intersection tool to place columns. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. 168 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click . NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar does not display. click Finish.Level 2 plan view 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. click Structural Column. Revit Structure places the tops of the columns at the current level and the bases of the columns at the level below. select W-Wide Flange-Column: W10x33.

specify a start point for the third level at a distance of 10' 0" above Level 2. Level 3 should be 10' 0" above Level 2. J5. Click OK. Create new levels 13 In the Project Browser. 19 Adjust the zoom settings so you can select the grid control below the grid head. Level 4 should be 10' 0" above Level 3 with an elevation of 30' 0". and double-click South Elevation. H5. Notice that columns are placed at each grid intersection. enter 2' 0" for Top Offset. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ . K5 K3. J1. K2 G5. TIP You may have to zoom into the grid intersection to right-click one of the columns. C5 Specify base and top of column elevations 9 Right-click the column located at C2. click Modify. 8 Select the columns listed below. In addition. you can adjust the height by clicking the temporary dimension and modifying the level elevation. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ G1. click Level. and click Select All Instances. 12 On the Design Bar. J2. H1. which are outside of the structure footprint. B5. NOTE If necessary. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 2' 0" for Base Offset. K1 G2. Notice the new level is named Level 3. Adjust location of the grid 18 Select grid head A. 15 On the left side of the elevation. and press DELETE. 16 Use the same method to create Level 4. and then specify the endpoint aligned with the existing level heads on the right side. 11 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints.7 Press ESC. 10 On the Options Bar. A new structural plan view by the same name is also created and listed within the Project Browser. K4 A5. Under Constraints. H2. Adding Structural Columns | 169 . there are a few extraneous columns on grid line intersections that are exterior to the structure.

The next exercise uses a new training file. 27 In the Select Levels dialog. select Level 3 and Level 4. or close the exercise file without saving changes.20 Drag the grid control above Level 4 as shown. select Structural Columns. All of the structural columns in the model remain selected. double-click Level 2. Spliced columns display from Ground Level to Level 4 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Check None. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . 26 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 22 Draw a pick box around the entire structural model. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Structural Plans. 23 On the Options Bar. Adding Horizontal Framing on page 171. click File menu ➤ Save As. TIP Press and hold CTRL when making multiple selections. Copy the columns to new levels 21 In the Project Browser. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 170 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click South Elevation. To save changes. 24 In the Filter dialog.

5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. TIP Place the cursor over a grid to display the grid name in a tooltip.Adding Horizontal Framing In this exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. click . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure. Add girders 4 On the View toolbar. 3 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Design Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Framing. double-click Level 2. click Beam. 6 Select grid lines H and J. you frame 4 bays of Level 2 by adding horizontal members and a steel deck. Adding Horizontal Framing | 171 . Click Grid. click Training Files. click Finish.rvt. click Modify. Specify beam type 1 In the Project Browser. Specify Girder for Usage. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Modify. 172 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Copy the girders to levels above 17 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Set top of steel 14 Right-click the girder between H3 and J3. 20 Click OK. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. Click OK. select Other. Under Constraints. select Level 3 and Level 4. 19 In the Select Levels dialog. and double-click East Section . Specify Girder for Usage.Perspective. click Beam. 21 In the Project Browser. enter -0' 7". and draw a girder from column to column. for z-Direction Justification.9 On grids H and J. delete the 2 small beam sections between grid lines 4 and 5. framing tag visibility was turned off and the beam visibility increased for training purposes. 12 Select a column center. 16 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. for z-Direction Offset Value. and click Select All Instances. click ■ ■ ■ . 15 On the Options Bar. framing the bays with girders. NOTE In the following image. expand 3D Views. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Spacing. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Beam_System. The next exercise uses a new training file. Under Pattern. click Sketch.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. under Structural Plans. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. To save changes. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Beam Systems In this exercise. click Beam System. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice the copied beams on Levels 3 and 4. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. For Justification. you can select the section crop view and drag its borders to adjust the extents of the view. For Beam Type. Adding Beam Systems on page 173. select Center. you add beam systems to Level 2. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. Sketch the beam system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. select Fixed Distance for Layout Rule. double-click Level 2. click Structural Beam System Properties. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. Adding Beam Systems | 173 . enter 6' 0".NOTE If necessary.

click Pick Supports. 10 On the Design Bar. Then select the 3 girders that surround the upper-left bay. click Beam Direction. 9 Select the girder between H3 and J3. 11 Select the vertical girder between J2 and J3.8 On the Design Bar. NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the H3-J3 girder represent the beam system direction. 174 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the next step you edit the beam direction. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines.

12 On the Design Bar. Adding Beam Systems | 175 . NOTE In the image above and all subsequent images. the framing tag visibility has been turned off for training purposes. click Finish Sketch.

specify 2. 176 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . For Number of Lines.13 Use the same method to sketch a beam system for the bay to the right using the following beam system property values in the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. select the girder between J2 and J3. For Beam Type. click Finish Sketch. 14 When specifying the beam direction. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Under Pattern. 15 On the Design Bar.

Under Pattern. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. 22 Click to place the beam system. 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the east side of the structure where you previously added the beams. For Number of Lines. specify 3. Adding Beam Systems | 177 . under Structural Plans. 19 On the Options Bar. Click OK. For Beam Type.Automatically create a beam system 16 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . double-click Level 2. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. 20 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 23 Select the top girder in the lower-right bay. click Beam System. select W-Wide Flange: W14x22. 21 Select the top girder in the lower-left bay.

You will need to cycle through some of the elements in your model by pressing TAB as explained above. 25 On the Design Bar. and press TAB until the beam system highlights. 178 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .24 Click to place the beam system. NOTE A beam system displays with dashed lines. Copy the beam systems to levels above 26 Hold the cursor over grid line H of the lower-left beam system. Be sure that you have selected a beam system (not just a beam) when copying elements to other levels. click Modify.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click East Sections . 31 Click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 Click File menu ➤ Close.Perspective. select Level 3 and Level 4. Notice the copied beam systems. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As.Beam system displays with dashed lines 27 Right-click on the beam system. Adding a Composite Deck on page 180. The next exercise uses a new training file. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click Select All Instances. To save changes. Adding Beam Systems | 179 .

Under Constraints.Adding a Composite Deck In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Type. 180 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . enter -0' 2" for Height Offset from Level. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Deck. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Floor Properties. and then sketch along the girders. you add a composite deck to Level 2. 7 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior-most model lines of the glazing as snap points. click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. 3 On the Design Bar. click Slab. Add composite deck 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. under Structural Plans.

and click OK. 11 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under 3D Views. double-click East Section . Copy the slab to other levels 9 Select the slab. 10 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 In the dialog. The filled half-arrows of this symbol represent the span of the deck. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Close.Revit Structure provides a deck span direction symbol when the deck is placed. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser.Perspective. select Level 3 and Level 4. Adding a Composite Deck | 181 .

16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation.To save changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Bracing. and when it highlights. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. 6 In the Type Selector.rvt. under Elevations (Interior Elevations). click to place the framing elevation symbol in the direction shown. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding Bracing In this exercise. and then click the left endpoint of the Level 2 beam for the start point. Use the Status Bar to see the snap point. Create the framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 182 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select L-Angle: L8x6x5/8. 7 Add a brace from Level 2 to Level 3: ■ Enter SE (keyboard shortcut for snap to endpoint). under Structural Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. you add vertical bracing to a bay. click Brace. Adding Bracing on page 182. The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click Elevation 1-a. 3 Move the cursor on or near the grid line between 4H and 4J.

you can select the section crop view and adjust the left/right extents to see the columns on grids H and J. 9 Repeat these steps to add bracing from Level 3 to Level 4. 8 Use the same method for the opposite brace.■ Enter SM (keyboard shortcut for snap to midpoint). NOTE If necessary. and then click the midpoint of the beam at Level 3 for the endpoint. Adding Bracing | 183 .

Adding Shear Walls on page 184. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. under Structural Plans. you create shear walls that surround one of the stairwells. 2 Zoom in on the east stair in grid location F3-G4. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.10 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Shear_Walls.Perspective. Add shear walls 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. click Training Files. double-click East Section . 184 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . or close the exercise file without saving changes. Notice the braces in the back/right of the structural model. double-click Level 2. Adding Shear Walls In this exercise. under 3D Views.

Adding Shear Walls | 185 . specify Ground Level. you can select a wall and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the wall to a particular location. TIP After sketching the walls. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Select Chain. 6 Sketch 4 walls.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior .10" Concrete. click Structural Wall. For Depth. 4 In the Type Selector. tracing over the centerline of the walls in the imported drawing file.

specify Up to level: Level 4 for Top Constraint. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Foundation. and draw a zoom box around the east area of the structure.rvt. you can use the TAB key to highlight the entire wall chain and select it with one click. To save changes. under Structural Plans. click . click . 2 On the View toolbar. under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog.7 Press ESC twice to finish placing walls. 4 On the Options Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Place isolated foundations 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. TIP During selection. you add isolated foundations to column locations. Adding Isolated Foundations on page 186. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. 8 Select all 4 walls. The next exercise uses a new training file. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding Isolated Foundations In this exercise. 3 Draw a pick box around all structural elements. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click .

Click OK. the imported DWG file does not display in this view. By default. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18".5 In the Filter dialog. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. . select Level 2 for Top Vertical Projection. Under Analytical Model. 11 In the drawing area. In your training file. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 6 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Click OK. enter 0' 0" for Base Offset. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE In the following image. click the midpoints of the columns where you have added horizontal framing to place an isolated footing at each location. Under Analytical Model. under Structural Plans. the footing is placed at Ground Level. the curtain wall visibility was altered for training purposes. select Ground Level for Bottom Vertical Projection. click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ 7 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. double-click Ground Level. Adding Isolated Foundations | 187 . Select Structural Columns.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the exercises that follow. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 3 In the Type Selector. 188 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . you complete the structural model. as well as cantilevers and outriggers. openings. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under 3D Views. and concrete wall framing. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.Perspective. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 In this exercise. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. double-click Level 2. you complete the horizontal framing of Level 2 by adding girders and beam systems.13 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. adding horizontal framing. Click Grid. Add girders using the grid tool 1 In the Project Browser. Specify Girder for Usage. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Beam. Completing the Structural Model on page 188. click File menu ➤ Save As. Completing the Structural Model In previous lessons. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_2. you have added columns and horizontal framing to your model.rvt. double-click East Section . bracing. foundation. To save changes. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Specify Level 2 for Plane. under Structural Plans.

■ Around the perimeter of the rotunda. click model. Add beam chains to the following locations. zooming in and out as needed: ■ Above grid line 1 between B and E. Use the W-Wide Flange: W18x40 beam type for the 5 new beams. .NOTE Although you previously added girders to the structural model. using the Grid tool does not duplicate girders at these locations. click Modify. complete the framing of this bay. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 9 Using the framing skills you have learned in previous exercises. click Finish. 5 Draw a pick box around all the grids. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 189 . TIP You can also press CTRL and select all grid lines manually. Manually add additional beams 8 On the View toolbar. 10 Add girders between the perimeter columns that were not captured by the Grid tool.

■ Between the lower-left corner between A4 and D5.■ Between the column below the midpoint of H2-H3 and the corner of the stairwell shear walls. 190 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . ■ Between the column just above K4 and over to F5.

click of the model. select the top girder. Under Pattern. click Beam System. and draw a zoom box around the bay in the upper-left corner 12 Select the girder between A2 and B2. For Number of Lines. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . for z-Direction Justification. for z-Direction Offset Value. click ■ ■ ■ . 17 On the Options Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 191 . Add a beam system to the bay 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Constraints. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. . 18 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. and click Select All Instances. select Other. Click OK. Click OK. enter 3. 19 In the bay adjacent to the upper-left stairwell. 13 Right-click. 20 Click to place the beam system. enter -0' 7".Specify the top of steel 11 On the View toolbar.

25 Using the sketch tool. enter -0' 7" for Elevation. click Finish Sketch. Select W-Wide Flange: W14x22 for Beam Type. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Number of Lines. Under Pattern.Sketch a beam system 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule. trace the outline of the bay. 192 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . enter 3. 23 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 22 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Sketch. Click OK. 26 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Beam System.

ignore it. If a warning appears indicating that pinned objects were deleted. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. Completing the Steel Framing of Level 2 | 193 .27 Select the beam that spans the middle of the stairwell and delete it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View toolbar. Add cantilevered members and outriggers 1 In the Project Browser. beam systems have been added to all bays. click model. In addition. under Structural Plans. you add cantilevered members and outriggers to Level 2. the base offset of the structural columns on the lower level has been set to zero so they will attach to the footings. the structural framing on Levels 3 and 4 (that you built in the first lesson of this tutorial) has been deleted for training purposes. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Cantilevered Beams In this exercise. . click Training Files. The visibility of structural framing tags has been turned off in the Level 2 plan view. Adding Cantilevered Beams on page 194. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_3. Lastly.NOTE You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is provided in the next exercise with the beam systems added as shown. Rather than having you add beam systems to the dozens of bays within this model. double-click Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the 194 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . In this new training file.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

for z-Direction Justification. select Other. for z-Direction Offset Value.3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor to the left and select a perpendicular point on the inside face of the exterior glazing as the endpoint. click ■ ■ ■ . 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Click OK. click Beam. Add cantilevers at columns 6 Select column A1 as the beam start point. enter -0' 7". Adding Cantilevered Beams | 195 . Under Constraints.

Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck In this exercise. 12 Select the left endpoint of the adjacent cantilever at A2 as the endpoint of the outrigger. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. Add intermediate cantilevers 13 Sketch intermediate beams between the outrigger and the beam between A1 and A2. add a cantilever beginning at column A2. select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add an outrigger 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 196 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 In the Type Selector. 11 Select the left endpoint of the cantilever at A1 as start point of the outrigger. click Beam. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck on page 196.8 Using the same method. you add a concrete slab with a metal deck to the model. The next exercise uses a new training file. or close the exercise file without saving changes. To save changes.

enter -0' 2". click Slab.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Floor Type. Use Trim/Extend to clean up line intersections and close gaps. click Floor Properties. 7. click Training Files.rvt. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. sketched. double-click Level 2. Adding a Concrete Slab with Metal Deck | 197 . 6. you can use a combination of lines including. Garage Level-1. click Lines. and Foundation. 5 On the Design Bar. Roof. In addition. select 3" LW Concrete on 2" Metal Deck. The pre-existing columns were paste-aligned to the roof level. straight. 6 Sketch lines along the structure perimeter using the interior lines of the glazing as snap points. additional cantilever beams and outriggers were added to the model. under Structural Plans. For Height Offset from Level. 3 On the Design Bar. picked. In this training file. When sketching this deck. Add concrete slab with metal deck 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_4. and arced. Click OK. the following new levels were added: 5.

TIP To sketch lines along the lower arced wall. and sketch a chain of continuous line segments. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 8 On the View toolbar. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click . 7 Click Finish Sketch. 198 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Chain on the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Enter SD (keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges).

11 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Shafts on page 199.

Adding Shafts
In this exercise, you add 2 shaft openings on Level 2. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Adding_Shafts.rvt.

Add first stairway shaft opening 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. NOTE Make sure this view is using the Wireframe model graphics display style. If it is not, use the View Control Bar to make the change. 2 Enter WF (keyboard shortcut for Wireframe). 3 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 5 On the Design Bar, click Pick Walls. 6 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

7 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter -1' 0". For Base Offset, enter -1' 0". Click OK.

Adding Shafts | 199

These settings ensure that the shaft extends through the structure without penetrating the roof or the foundation. 9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Add second stairway shaft opening 10 Zoom around the stairway in grid location A1-B2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 12 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 13 Sketch the opening surrounding the stairwell.

TIP When sketching the shaft, use the Lines tool in combination with the Pick option and select the external face of the walls imported with the DWG file. Use the Trim tool to clean up gaps and intersections. 14 On the Design Bar, click Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. For Base Constraint, select Foundation. For Top Offset, enter 1' 0". For Base Offset, enter 1' 0". Click OK.

16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View toolbar, click .

200 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

18 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 19 Proceed to the next exercise, Duplicating Framing on page 201.

Duplicating Framing
In this exercise, you copy Level 2 framing to other levels. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Duplicate_Framing.rvt.

Copy Level 2 framing and deck 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 2 Enter ZF, and draw a pick box around the entire model. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 5 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 7 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 3, Level 4, and Level 5, and then click OK.

Duplicating Framing | 201

8 On the View toolbar, click
Copied levels with stair openings

.

Modify roof and framing 9 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 10 Select the floor. 11 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 12 Delete the atrium arc, and use the Trim tool to close the gap.

NOTE In the image shown above, the weight of the sketch lines was increased for training purposes.

202 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 14 On the View toolbar, click 15 Select all framing and columns. NOTE Press and hold CTRL as you make multiple selections. , and draw a zoom box around the former atrium area.

16 Press DELETE. Ignore the warning that pinned objects were deleted. Add cantilever beams and outriggers 17 Zoom in on the former atrium area.

18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Beam. 19 On the Type Selector, select W-Wide Flange: W18x40. 20 On the Options Bar, specify Girder for Usage. 21 On the Options Bar, click .

Duplicating Framing | 203

22 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Under Constraints, for z-Direction Justification, select Other. Under Constraints, for z-Direction Offset Value, enter -0' 7". Click OK.

23 Add cantilever beams and outriggers to complete the new corner.

Extend the shaft to roof level 24 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 2. 25 Zoom around the stairway in grid location F3-G4. 26 Select the 4 walls surrounding the stairwell.

27 On the Options Bar, click
■ ■

.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, do the following: For Top Constraint, select Up to level: Roof. Click OK.

Copy roof framing and slab to Level 6 and 7 29 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Level 5. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire model within the drawing area. 31 Draw a pick box around the entire model. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

204 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

33 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Structural Framing (Girder, Joist, and Other), Structural Beam Systems, and Floors, and then click OK. 34 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 35 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 36 In the Select Levels dialog, select Level 6, and Level 7, and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar, click .

Notice the atrium columns on Levels 5 through 7 need to be deleted. This is done for you in the next training file. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 39 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding a Shape-Modified Slab on page 205.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab
In this new training file, beam systems have been added to the roof level to support a new shape-modified slab, and the footings added at the beginning of the tutorial have been deleted. In this exercise, you add a shape-modified slab to the new roof framing, and create a custom roof type with tapered insulation. In this exercise, you create a shape-modified slab above Level 7. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_5.rvt.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 205

Open the roof framing section view 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 2 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the structural framing is sloped to provide for roof drainage. Create new roof type 3 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 4 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the upper roof framing.

206 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 6 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, for Type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insulation, and click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 9 In the Name dialog, enter 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - 4" Rigid Insulation, and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 11 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for Layer 2, clear Variable, and click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 3' 5 1/2", and click OK. Trace the outline of the roof

13 On the View toolbar, click structure. 14 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 15 On the Options Bar, click

, and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

, and enter 5" for Offset.

16 Click the beam on the upper-left corner of the structure so the offset is placed on the outside of the beam.

17 Enter ZF. 18 Using the same method, click additional lines that outline the roof.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 207

19 On the Toolbar, click

(Trim).

20 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the roof outline.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 21 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch.

208 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

22 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Atrium.

Edit the slab 23 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 24 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click Edit. 25 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 26 Select specific supports.

27 On the Toolbar, click

.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 209

28 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click one of the sketched lines, and then click each additional line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected. 29 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof.

Notice the opening in the shape-modified slab. 31 On the View toolbar, click section view. , and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the

Notice the slab is not sloped towards the opening in the center of the slab. Pick supports for modifying the slope of the roof slab 32 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 33 Select the slab, and on the Options Bar, click (Modify Sub-Elements).

210 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

The corner points of the slab are highlighted.

34 On the Options Bar, click

(Pick Supports).

35 Click each of the 6 roof supports shown below in the order indicated.

NOTE The Pick Supports tool will create an elevation control point at the end of each of the 6 selected support location lines. 36 On the Design bar, click Modify. 37 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 38 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 211

Notice the roof deck is now resting on the roof supports. 39 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 40 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Slab. 41 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 42 In the Element Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

For type, select 1 1/2" Metal Roof Deck - Tapered Insul Under Constraints, for Height Offset From Level, enter 2' 9 1/2". Click OK.

43 On the Design Bar, click Pick Supports. 44 Select specific supports.

45 On the Toolbar, click

.

46 With the Trim/Extend tool selected, click each line to complete the outline of the shape-modified slab.

212 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

Each line will be extended and trimmed as it is selected.

47 On the Design bar, click Finish Sketch. 48 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 49 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view.

Notice the flat portion of the roof is now covered by the slab. Draw split line to slope the variable layer 50 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Roof. 51 On the View toolbar, click , and draw a zoom box around the center of the roof.

52 Select the roof (that was just created) as shown.

Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 213

Press TAB to make sure the interior roof boundary is selected. 53 On the Options Bar, click (Draw Split Lines).

The corner points of the opening are displayed.

54 Sketch a split line.

55 Press ESC. 56 Select the split line that was just created. 57 On the Options Bar, enter 5" for Elevation. 58 Press ENTER.

214 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model

click . 62 On the View toolbar. 65 Select the tapered roof. and draw a zoom box around the center of the section view. Adding a Shape-Modified Slab | 215 . 61 Double-click the section bubble located near grid line D to open the section view of the roof. 64 Select the existing flat roof to the left of the tapered roof. click Modify. Notice the tapered insulation tapers away from the split line support. 60 Enter ZF. Join the geometry of the roof types 63 On the Toolbar. click (Join Geometry). and on the Design Bar. click Modify.59 On the Design Bar.

To save changes. click Training Files. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open the plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof framing. you add a shape-modified slab to the curved roof of the atrium.rvt.Atrium. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab In this exercise. click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Slab. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 5. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab on page 216. The next exercise uses a new training file. 216 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click File menu ➤ Save As. using the slab shape edit tools. 2 On the View toolbar. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. double-click 3D . under Structural Plans.66 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the shape edit tools display on the Options Bar. Sketch split lines 5 On the Options Bar. and is available for modification. click (Draw Split Lines). click (Modify Sub-Elements). The edge of the curved slab highlights. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 217 . 4 On the Options Bar.3 Select the atrium curved slab. 6 Click the center point of the slab arc.

7 Sketch a single split line to approximately the edge of the slab. click (Add New Points). 218 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 9 Click to place a drainage point approximately along the split line. Place a single drainage point 8 On the Options Bar.

click .Place additional points 10 Click to place six additional points approximately along the edge of the slab. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 219 . 11 On the Design Bar. Delete split lines 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the shape edit points display. and press DELETE. 12 Select the curved slab. click Modify. 14 Select the split lines.

Notice that the edges of the curved slab display.Atrium. double-click 3D .Set drainage point elevation 15 Click the drainage point elevation dimension. under 3D Views. click . View the atrium slab in 3D 16 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View toolbar. 220 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and enter -0’ 6”. The general shape of the curved slab displays. and draw a zoom box around the atrium roof.

click section view. double-click Level 5. 19 On the View toolbar.View section view of slab 18 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Curved Edge Condition dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural Plans. Complete the slab geometry 26 In the Project Browser. click Project to side. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice that the tapered insulation layer of the curved slab is sloped towards the drainage point. click OK. 21 Select the slab. double-click Section 3. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under Slab Shape Edit. under Sections (Building Sections). click . and click OK. . Set the curved edge condition 20 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 221 . for Curved Edge Condition. click Conform to Curve.Atrium. 22 On the Options Bar.

click .27 On the Options Bar. click 28 On the Options Bar. 30 Click the center drainage point. 222 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and select the left endpoint of the curved slab. and select the right endpoint of the curved slab. . enter SX (Snap to Point). enter SX. 29 Click the center drainage point.

Verify the slab spot elevation 33 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . under 3D Views. 35 On the Options Bar.31 On the Design Bar.Atrium. 34 Select the atrium curved slab. click Modify. 36 Select each point along the slab edge and verify that the spot elevation is set to 0' 0". 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5. click . under Structural Plans. Adding a Shape-Modified Curved Slab | 223 .

40 Proceed to the next exercise. . and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the Notice the tapered insulation layer slopes to the low point as a planar surface. To save changes. click Training Files.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save As. click section view. double-click 3D . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.View the completed slab section 37 In the Project Browser. Adding Miter Joins on page 224. 38 On the View toolbar. double-click Section 3. under Sections (Building Sections). under 3D Views. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Miter_Joins. 2 Select the slab. and save the exercise file with a unique name.View. View the roof frame 1 In the Project Browser. you add miter joins to the beams on the roof frame to create a flush connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Miter Joins In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 224 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 39 Click File menu ➤ Close.

click . and draw a zoom box around the corner of the roof frame. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Add the miter join 5 Click the beam on the west side of the roof frame. Only non-concrete beams with shared end joins are available for edit. 6 On the Options Bar. Adding Miter Joins | 225 . 4 On the View toolbar.3 On the View Control Bar. The slab is now hidden. click (Edit Beam Joins). You can now use the Beam Join Editor.

226 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 8 Click the arrow control on the second beam.7 Click the arrow control on the first beam.

9 Click the padlock icon to lock the miter join.The miter join is complete. The miter lock is used to lock geometry but allows symbolic manipulation (in Coarse View). Adding Miter Joins | 227 .

11 Click the arrow on the beam symbolic line. select Detail Level: Coarse. Notice the symbolic line is no longer joined.View the miter join in coarse view 10 On the View Control Bar. 228 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . select Detail Level: Fine. 12 On the View Control Bar. Notice the miter lock remains locked.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Curved_Beams. click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. you add a curved beam to the atrium. Adding Curved Beams | 229 . To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Curved Beams In this exercise.rvt. click .Notice the miter lock remains locked. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. Adding Curved Beams on page 229. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Zoom in on the atrium 1 In the Project Browser. The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click Level 4. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. and draw a zoom box around the atrium. under Structural Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

select Chain. click Beam. 6 Click the atrium column to select the beam start point. 7 Click the column to select the beam endpoint. 5 On the Options Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. and click . 230 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 4 In the Type Selector.Place the curved beams 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Curved Beams | 231 .8 Click the grid line so the beam snaps to the grid.

9 Press ESC twice. 12 While pressing CTRL. click . 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Using the same method. select the remaining curved beams.The beam is placed. Set the curved beam properties 11 Select one of the curved beams. place additional curved beams between the atrium columns. 232 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

double-click Level 4. For Elevation. select Top of Beam. 22 Select the bottom beam. and on the View Control Bar. select W-Wide Flange: W14 X 22. Notice the orange lines representing the curved beam analytical model are placed at the top of beam. enter 0' 0". enter -0' 7" for End Level Offset For z-Direction Justification. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. For Beam Type. Add a beam system to the atrium 18 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. enter 6' 0". for Layout Rule. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter -0' 7" for Start Level Offset Under Constraints. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. under Structural Plans. Under Pattern.Atrium. and for Vertical Projection. View the analytical model of the curved beams 15 In the Project Browser. select 3D. 19 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. For Maximum Spacing. click Beam System. 20 On the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. Adding Curved Beams | 233 . select Top. 21 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. double-click 3D . Scroll down to Analytical Model. 16 Select the floor.

234 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 23 Using the same method. place a beam system in the remaining bays of the atrium.The beam system is placed.

and on the View Control Bar. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Analytical Model. 28 Select the floor. 25 Select the beam. select Approximate Curve. For Maximum discretized offset. enter 0' 4". NOTE When hard-points are enabled. under Structural Plans. the analytical model will end at points on the curve where other framing members are joined. Select Use hard-points. select Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and on the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around one of the curved beams. double-click 3D . click . Click OK.Approximate the curve of the analytical model 24 On the View toolbar.Atrium. Additional line segments will be added to satisfy the Maximum Discretized Offset parameter. Adding Curved Beams | 235 . . 27 In the Project Browser.

you add an opening (doorway) to the structural walls of the stairway. The next exercise uses a new training file. To save changes. 1 In the Project Browser. Adding an Opening on page 236. under Structural Plans. click . double-click Ground Level. Notice the analytical line of the curved beam is represented by segments instead of a single curved line. click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. 236 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .rvt.29 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the curved beams are visible. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Openings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or close the exercise file without saving changes. Adding an Opening In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. you then copy the opening to each level. and draw a zoom box around the stairway.

Adding an Opening | 237 . 6 Select the door opening. 4 Click stairway wall to place the door opening approximately as shown.3 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. click Door. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.

. and draw a zoom box around the opening created in the 238 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 13 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the stairway is visible. . 14 On the View toolbar. select 3D View. select Level 2. click stairway. 10 While pressing SHIFT. select Level 7. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 12 In the Project Browser. so that levels 2-7 are highlighted. 11 Click OK. under 3D Views. 9 In the Select Levels dialog.

Adding an Opening in a Beam on page 239. click Training Files. you import the revised beam back into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View toolbar. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. The next exercise uses a new training file. click . Finally. 4 Select the beam that requires the opening. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Opening ➤ Opening by Face. Adding an Opening in a Beam In this exercise.15 Click File menu ➤ Close. and draw a zoom box around any beam on an upper floor. You then add an opening to selected beams by creating an extrusion in the beam family. click File menu ➤ Save As. Add an opening (by face) to a single beam 1 In the Project Browser. Adding an Opening in a Beam | 239 . To save changes. expand 3D Views. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click 3D View. under Structural Plans. or close the exercise file without saving changes. you add an opening to the face of a single beam and add stiffener plates to the beam opening.

click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. draw a stiffener plate on both horizontal surfaces of the opening.Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the beam and not the floor or beam system. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 Using the sketch tool. select Linear Stiffener-Plate: Standard. 5 Using the sketch tools. click Finish Sketch. draw an opening in the beam approximately as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . Make sure the opening forms a closed loop. click Component. Add stiffener plates to the opening 7 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar.

and double-click 3D View. click ■ ■ . you load the new family into the project. To save changes. expand 3D Views. you open an existing beam family using the Family Editor. 15 Continue with the next exercise. 13 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Dimensions. Finally. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 241 . click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 On the View toolbar. You then modify the beam by adding an opening. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter 0' 2". 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 12 On the Options Bar. click . Click OK. for d. under Structural Plans. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family In this exercise. select both stiffener plates.rvt. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select the beam 1 In the Project Browser. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family on page 241.Change the stiffener plate properties 11 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around any beam on a lower floor.

9 In the Work Plane dialog. and draw a circle approximately as shown. click . 5 In the Revit dialog. 242 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . click Yes to open the W-Wide Flange beam type for editing. click located to the left of Offset. 10 Click OK 11 On the Options Bar. 7 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). Add an opening by extrusion 6 In the Family Project Browser. and select Reference Plane: Center (Front/Back). 8 On the Family Design Bar. and double-click Front. 14 On the Family Design Bar. click Modify. The beam is displayed in a new window. click Name. under Specify a New Work Plane.3 Select the beam. and draw a zoom box around the center line of the beam. Open the beam family 4 On the Options Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and click (Circle). The Front elevation of the beam is displayed. 12 Click the centerline of the beam. click Edit Family. 13 Press ESC.

23 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC. click (Align). 22 Select the horizontal centerline reference plane. click (Align). 16 In the Element Properties dialog. regardless of the length. 18 Select the vertical centerline reference plane. 24 On the Design Bar. click . . Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 243 . click Finish Sketch. NOTE Aligning and locking the centerline of the circle to the reference plane ensures the circle will remain in the center of the beam. 19 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the circle. 25 On the View toolbar. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. and select the centerline of the circle. select the Center Mark Visible parameter. and the select the centerline of the circle. 21 On the Options Bar.15 Select the circle. click The centerline of the circle is now visible.

26 Select the circle on the beam. 30 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Extrude the opening 28 Click the right directional arrow.rfa. select Model Graphic Style: Shading w/Edges. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 On the View Control toolbar. and slide the cylinder to the right so the extrusion passes through the beam. The extrusion is displayed as a cylinder. and save the revised beam family file as W-Wide Flange with Opening. 244 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

rvt located in the Imperial project file. Adding an Opening to a Beam Family | 245 . click Load into Projects. 38 Click in the drawing area. Select the new beam family 37 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Load into Projects dialog. select i_RST_CSM_Add_Opening_in_Beam. and click OK.rfa. 34 On the View toolbar. 33 Enter ZF. select the modified beam type W-Wide Flange with Opening: W18X40. click .Load the modified beam family into the project 31 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 35 Click on the lowest beam located on the corner of Level 2. and draw a zoom box around the beams for the lower floors. The project file reopens. select the beams for Levels 2 through 4. 36 While pressing CTRL.

and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_6. a roof with tapered insulation has been added over Level 7. you add structural walls. 246 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving changes. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 40 Continue with the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this new training file.The modified beams with openings display. click File menu ➤ Save As. In addition. You add these walls using the Ground Level view. The next exercise uses a new training file.rvt. and walls are generated downward to the foundation. Adding Foundation Walls on page 246. 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. Adding Foundation Walls In this exercise. To save changes. the atrium columns on Levels 6 and 7 have been deleted.

. double-click Ground Level. 5 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Base Constraint. under Structural Plans. enter -0' 6". Click OK. The imported DWG file was copied and paste-aligned to this level for you. select Basic Wall: Foundation . For Top Offset. 4 On the Options Bar. click 7 Click the arc line of the imported DWG file.12" Concrete. select Foundation. for Location Line. click Structural Wall. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.Sketch the atrium walls 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Foundation Walls | 247 . click ■ ■ ■ ■ . 6 On the Options Bar. select Wall Centerline.

A foundation wall is added and aligned with the wall centerline. 11 In the Project Browser. you can use an arc or a chain of small wall segments. click . 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. under 3D Views. double-click 3D View. Use the center of the curtain wall lines in the DWG file as an underlay to trace over. 9 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to add foundation walls to the remaining perimeter of the model. 12 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the foundation wall is visible. On portions of the south wall. and select Chain. Sketch the remaining foundation walls 8 On the Options Bar. 248 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 10 Press ESC twice to finish the wall sketch.

If you select all the grid lines and add columns to all intersections. TIP You can use the Grid Intersection tool to speed up this process. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. make sure you delete the columns outside the structure perimeter. and save the exercise file with a unique name. press TAB. you add piers or pilasters and concrete columns at each steel column location. double-click Ground Level. double-click 3D View. click Structural Column. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you will still need to manually add piers to the locations that are not on a grid line. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Piers. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.To save changes. such as the atrium. 4 In the Options Bar.rvt. Adding Piers or Pilasters In this exercise. In addition. click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. Concrete pier centered on steel column 6 On the Design Bar. Add concrete piers 1 In the Project Browser. and select the foundation wall chain. 5 Within the perimeter of the structure model. add a concrete column centered on each steel column location. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 8 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. Adding Piers or Pilasters on page 249. 3 In the Type Selector. The next exercise uses a new training file. and click Hide Element. click the Temporary Hide/Isolate control. Adding Piers or Pilasters | 249 . under 3D Views. select Concrete-Square-Column: 18x18. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Save As. select Foundation for Depth.

4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Type. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_7. click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 5 On the Design Bar. The next exercise uses a new training file. double-click Ground Level. click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Slab. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter 0.rvt Frame ground and parking levels 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor Properties. select 6" Concrete.This provides a better view of the new below-grade piers. The foundation wall is displayed. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels on page 250. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. To save changes. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. and concrete beam framing. For Height Offset From Level. you frame the garage and ground levels by adding slabs. 250 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. sloped slabs. Click OK. click Pick Walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

click Delete Type. use the flip controls to toggle to the exterior face.6 Select the exterior face of the foundation walls. WARNING If an error dialog displays regarding the span direction component. double-click 3D View. under 3D Views. TIP Press TAB to select the wall chain. NOTE When prompted whether you would like the walls that go up to this floor’s level to attach to its bottom. 7 Click Finish Sketch. 8 In the Project Browser. If necessary. click Yes. 9 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the slab is visible. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 251 .

18 Manually delete the beams added to the atrium. This prevents a beam being added between the atrium at G1 and G3. click Grid. 20 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam:16x32. under Structural Plans.Frame concrete girders 10 In the Project Browser. expand the warning and select the framing element. It will display as selected in the drawing area. 15 Remove grid line G from the selection: while pressing SHIFT. 252 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . It is most likely a segment that can be deleted or unjoined. 13 On the Options Bar. Resolve the problem by clicking the appropriate solution. click Finish. select the line. click Beam. NOTE If you are warned of a problem with keeping elements joined. click Modify. 17 Manually add a beam between G3 and G4. 14 Select all grid lines. double-click Ground Level. 19 Manually delete the beams placed between grid F2 and G2. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and another between G4 and G5. 16 On the Options Bar.

Other) and Floors. click Modify. 23 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. 24 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 25 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. NOTE The foundation walls have been hidden in this view so the girders are visible. select Structural Framing (Girder. 26 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View. click .Copy the framing and slab to Garage Level -1 21 Drag a pick box around the entire model. click Check None. Joist. and then click OK. select Garage Level -1. under 3D Views. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view so the concrete girders are visible. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 253 . 29 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar.

double-click South Elevation. 31 On the View Control Bar. 37 Sketch a slope arrow from left to right. and select Element Properties. click Lines. click Slope Arrow. 35 Sketch the slab in the southwest exterior corner of the structure. For Level at Head. For Height Offset at Tail. enter 0' 6". 32 Zoom in around the lower-left corner of the model. 254 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 43 Zoom in on the lower-left corner to see the ramp. 40 On the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. select Ground Level for Level at Tail. 38 Right-click the slope arrow. and click Hidden Line. 39 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Hidden Line. 36 On the Design Bar. enter 0. click the Model Graphics Style control.Add the garage entrance exit ramp 30 In the Project Browser. 41 In the Project Browser. 42 On the View Control Bar. select Garage Level-1. click Slab. Click OK. click the Model Graphics Style control. 33 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Garage Level -1. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 34 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. For Height Offset at Head.

click Beam System. select Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 16 X 32. Click OK. 49 Select the underside face of the existing ramp. 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Beam Type. . For Value. select Structural Beam System Properties. select Pick a plane. Framing Ground and Parking Garage Levels | 255 . 46 On the Modelling Tab of the Design Bar. select Fixed Number for Layout Rule Value. and click OK. click . 55 Draw an outline of the ramp. double-click 3D View. and draw a zoom box around the ramp. under Number of Lines. 52 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. under 3D Views. 45 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. and zoom in on the ramp. Under Pattern. click 54 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Work Plane dialog.Completed ramp Add a sloped beam system under the ramp 44 In the Project Browser. under Structural Views. select Ground Level. click Set Work Plane. enter 5. click Lines.

click Finish Sketch. NOTE Ignore the warning regarding the analytical point of the beam and slab. corner to corner. 57 In the Project Browser. click . 256 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model . 60 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can immediately draw the rectangular opening. click . Add a wall opening at the garage entrance 59 On the View toolbar. click Opening ➤ Wall Opening. When you are adding a wall opening. 61 Select the foundation wall that faces the short edge of the new ramp.56 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the ramp. under 3D Views. and zoom in on the wall that faces the end of the new ramp. double-click 3D View. there are no drawing tools to select. 62 Sketch the opening. 58 On the View toolbar.

you add an isolated foundation beneath the piers. 65 Click File menu ➤ Close. In addition. Placing a Wall Foundation on page 257. 64 Select the garage opening. you may get a warning message that elements cannot remain joined. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Notice that you can adjust the opening extents using the controls. click File menu ➤ Save As. you add a continuous foundation beneath the exterior walls of the structural model. 63 On the Design Bar. Placing a Wall Foundation | 257 . click Unjoin Elements. and continue with the next step.NOTE Depending on where you draw the opening. To save changes. In this case. Placing a Wall Foundation In this exercise. 66 Proceed to the final exercise. click Modify. The next exercise uses a new training file.

2 Enter ZF. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Foundation ➤ Wall. and click to select the foundation wall chain. and open Imperial\i_RST_CSM_Wall_Foundation. click Edit/New. 14 Click the midpoint of each of the concrete columns to place an isolated foundation at each location. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. press TAB until the chain of walls is highlighted. clear Structural Framing. click Modify. click Training Files. enter 1' 6". under Visibility. A continuous foundation is added. for Toe length.rvt. under Structural Plans. enter 1' 6". 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For Heel length. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Sketch the continuous foundation 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Edit foundation properties 6 Select one of the foundation walls. 4 Place the cursor over one of the foundation walls. Click OK twice. Place isolated foundation 10 On the View menu. 13 In the Type Selector. click 9 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Foundation. and click OK. select Footing-Rectangular: 72"x48"x18". enter 1' 6". 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Foundation Thickness. Under Dimensions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 258 | Chapter 5 Creating a Structural Model .

click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D View. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Project Browser. Precast Concrete on page 261. 18 Proceed to the next tutorial. Placing a Wall Foundation | 259 . under 3D Views. In the next tutorial a new training file is supplied. You can save the open file if you wish. You have completed the Creating a Structural Model tutorial.

260 .

you work with precast concrete components using the tools available in Revit Structure 2009. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing project. Adding a Beam System to the Structure In this exercise. 261 . click Training Files. You then modify the precast beam type within the Revit Structure family editor. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Precast_Concrete. you add a precast beam system to the roof of an existing structure.Precast Concrete 6 In this tutorial. you add a precast concrete beam system to an existing structure. double-click Roof. In the first lesson. click Beam System. Creating a Precast Beam System In this lesson. under Structural Plans.rvt.

select Clear Spacing. The beam system is displayed. 262 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . For Beam Type. 6 Click to place the beam system. 5 Select the top girder on the north side of the structure as shown. The longitudinal axis of the beam system members will be placed parallel to these lines. select Precast-Double Tee: 8' x 20". select Center. 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The dotted lines represent the beam system direction. For Clear Spacing. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under 3D Views. do the following: For Layout Rule. Click OK.3 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 1". 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Pattern. For Justification. double-click 3D.

Changing the Beam System Properties | 263 . 1 On the View Toolbar.rvt. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the beam system as Notice the gap between the edge of the beam system and the concrete beam. you change the construction properties so the beam system will extend to the concrete support beam. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Precast-in progress. 2 Click one of the precast beams as shown. . Changing the Beam System Properties on page 263.rvt.8 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. click shown. Changing the Beam System Properties In this exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress.

double-click Section 1. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice the spacing between each precast beam. and click Select All Instances. The beam system now extends to the concrete support beam. 7 Proceed to the next exercise. i_RST_Precast-in progress. enter 0' 5". under Construction. 2 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Roof. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing In this exercise.rvt 1 In the Project Browser. for Start and End Extension. 3 Select the beam system. and click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. you change clear spacing of the beam system to adjust the gap between each beam. 264 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .3 Right-click the selected beam. Changing the Beam System Clear Spacing on page 264. under Sections (Building Section). click . 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

enter 0' 0". 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Proceed to the next lesson. under Construction. for Clear Spacing.4 On the Options Bar. you open the precast beam within the family editor and add a chamfer to both beam supports. you add a chamfer to the existing double-tee beam family. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam In this exercise. Modifying the Precast Beam Family | 265 . click . You then import the revised beam back into the project. Modifying the Precast Beam Family In this lesson. Notice the clear spacing between each precast beam is removed. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. Modifying the Precast Beam Family on page 265. double-click Section 1.

click Edit Family.rvt. i_RST_Precast-in progress. Open the beam type for editing 1 Click one of the precast beams as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1). 5 Select the beam. and double-click Left. 2 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Family Project Browser. 3 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to open the Precast-Double Tee Family for editing. 266 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . The beam is displayed in a new window.Training File ■ Use the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

■ ■ Under Visibility. 9 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. and click Edit. click . 12 Select each of the dimensions representing the slope length. click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 In the Revit dialog. click Yes to open the Double Tee-Profile for editing. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. and drag them above the top horizontal surface of the beam profile as shown. and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. Zoom in on the left tee of the beam 11 On the View Toolbar. The reference planes and dimensions are now visible. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Double Tee-Profile.Open the beam profile 6 In the Family Project Browser. and then click OK. Click Apply. NOTE The dimensions should be visible under normal circumstances but are purposely hidden for this demo. 7 Right-click Double Tee-Profile. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 267 . 10 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

click Ref Plane. Draw vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. select Not a Reference. 268 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete .Draw horizontal reference plane 13 On the Design bar. click Ref Plane. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Draw a horizontal reference plane below the existing plane. 17 Select the horizontal reference plane. and click OK. 15 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". 18 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. for Is Reference. click . 16 Press ESC. 21 Draw a vertical reference plane to the left of the center line as shown. under Options.

select both vertical reference planes. Add dimensions to each reference plane 29 On the Design Bar. under Options.22 Press ESC. click . 27 On the Options Bar. 30 Add a dimension for the left vertical reference plane. click Dimension. and click OK. 26 While pressing CTRL. 25 Use the same technique to draw a vertical reference plane to the right of center as shown. 24 Press ESC. and click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. select Not a Reference. 23 Click the reference plane dimension and enter 0' 2". for Is Reference. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 269 . 28 In the Element Properties dialog.

32 Add a dimension for the horizontal reference plane as shown. 33 Click the lock symbol next to the dimension to lock the distance. click . and draw a zoom box around the left tee of the beam. NOTE Make sure the top dimension line snaps to the horizontal reference plane and not the horizontal line of the beam. Align the bottom horizontal surface of the beam 35 On the View Toolbar.31 Repeat for the vertical reference plane on the opposite side as shown. 270 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 34 Press ESC.

Press TAB to make sure you are selecting the end point of the line and not the reference plane. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 271 . and drag the end point away from the angled line as shown.36 Click the bottom horizontal line of the beam. 42 Repeat this technique for the inside of the same tee. 38 For the align-to point. 39 Select the line representing the bottom surface of the beam as shown. 40 Click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. Sketch new profile 43 Select the angled line as shown. select the vertical reference plane as shown. 37 Enter AL (this is the keyboard shortcut for Align). 41 Press ESC.

Snap to the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.44 Press DELETE. click Lines. 45 On the Design bar. 47 Press ESC. 272 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . 46 Sketch the new profile for the beam as follows: ■ ■ ■ Snap to the end point of the lower horizontal plane. 48 Repeat this technique for the opposite side of the beam. Snap to the end of the top horizontal line.

click . 50 Click the horizontal reference plane and drag it beyond the right tee of the beam as shown. 51 On the View Toolbar.Modify the right tee of the beam 49 Enter ZF (this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). and draw a zoom box around the right tee of the beam. Adding a Chamfer to the Beam | 273 .

274 | Chapter 6 Precast Concrete . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Tee Width. ■ ■ ■ ■ Draw vertical reference planes. Click Apply. enter 10' 0". 54 In the Family Types dialog. 55 Click Edit menu ➤ Undo Family Type to undo the dimension changes. If it does not. and then click OK. fix any problems with alignment or constraints. Reload the family into the project 56 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Flex the design 53 On the Design bar. Creating Drawings on page 275. 57 In the Reload Family dialog. The beam should adapt to all changes. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. click Load into Projects. For Width.52 Repeat the following techniques for the right tee of the beam. enter 6' 0". 58 Proceed to the next tutorial. Sketch the new profile. Add dimensions to each reference plane. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam updates with the latest changes. Align the bottom horizontal surface.

The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. and how to create new views from a model. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Structure project. 3D view. Sheet views update automatically when you modify your model. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Sheets are defined by borders. how to add views to the sheets. you can add different views of the model directly to the sheet. elevation. and three-dimensional (3D) views. 275 . Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. which are a type of view in a project. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your structural model. and section views. section. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model using Revit Structure 2009. begin by first creating sheets. and are accessible from the Project Browser. usually contain a title block.Creating Drawings 7 In this tutorial. The project used in the following exercises is the same one used in the previous lesson. you create a drawing sheet that includes a plan view.

select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. 276 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . click Edit for Project Address. For Project Number. 5 Specify the remaining instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Anytown.rvt. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter Initial Draft. 6 Click OK. For Project Status. For Client Name. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. right-click. enter Office Structure. Smith. and click OK. 3 In the Edit Text dialog box. enter J. 2 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 2006-01. enter the following address: 123 Main Street. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. enter 31 March 2006. click Training Files. MA 12345. Create a sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the title block family (shown below) contain labels that automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered. click Sheet. and open Imperial\i_RST_Drawings. and click View. For Project Name. 8 In the Select a Title block dialog box. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 4 Click OK.

expand Sheets (all). enter Plans and Elevations. enter S-1. click Modify. The sheet name and number are displayed in the title block and in the Project Browser. 16 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. on the Options Bar. and select the title block. Change the sheet name and number in the title block 10 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. Add a plan view to the sheet 14 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 In the Views dialog box. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name S-2 . and click to place the view. do the following: ■ ■ . 11 When the title block highlights. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 277 . Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet number. Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet name. select Structural Plan: Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Click OK. click Add View. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click Add View to Sheet. 26 Position the view below the Structural Plan: Level 2. and click View Properties. select Elevation: South Elevation. 22 In the Views dialog box. clear Crop View. click Add View. NOTE If necessary. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Extents. Click OK. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. Add an elevation to the sheet 21 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. right-click. specify 1/16" = 1'.17 With the view selected. and click Element Properties. right-click. specify 1/16" = 1'. right-click.0" for View Scale. 28 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. 19 Drag the view to the upper-left corner of the sheet. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 24 With the view selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. If you were to open the Structural Plan: Level 2. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view.0" for View Scale. under Graphics. and click Element Properties. 27 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 23 Click on the lower half of the sheet to place the view. 20 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view. you would see that the scale plan view is now 1/16" = 1'0". and click OK. 278 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .

select 3D View: East Section . 31 Click on the upper-right corner of the sheet to place the view. and dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. Add a 3D view to the sheet 29 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and save the file as i_RST_Drawings-in progress. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If necessary.NOTE If necessary. and click Add View to Sheet. Creating a Drawing Sheet | 279 . 30 In the Views dialog box.Perspective. click Add View. Adding a Sheet to the Project on page 280. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position.rvt. 32 Adjust the length of the title line by selecting the view.

incrementally named S-2 Section Views. Section Views is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. under Sheets (all). 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select the title block. The new sheet. and then add them to a new drawing sheet. click Sheet. enter Section Views for Sheet Name. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. you learn how to create a new section view and a new callout view. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click OK. is displayed in the Project Browser. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets on page 280. you add a new sheet to the project.rvt. and click OK. under Identity Data. and adjust the scale of the view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. add a section view. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 280 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . and on the Options Bar. click . 2 In the Select a Title block dialog box. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 281 . 2 On the View Toolbar. 4 On the Options Bar. i_RST_Drawings-in progress. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.0" for Scale.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Section. and add it to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser under Structural Plans.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click . and zoom in on the east area of the structure as shown. select 1/16" = 1'. Create a section view of Level 2. 5 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click between grid lines G and H to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). double-click Level 2.

and click OK.0" for View Scale. 6 In the Project Browser. 13 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. under Sheets (all).■ Move the cursor to the right and click between grid lines J and K to place the section tail and complete the section line. click Add View. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify 3/16" = 1' . double click Section 1. NOTE If necessary. select Section: Section 1. 282 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. and click Add View to Sheet. Create a callout view. double-click S-2 Section Views. 10 With the view selected. 12 Drag the title line under the elevation view. 9 Click on the upper-left corner of the sheet to place the view. under Sections (Building Sections). and add it to the sheet 14 In the Project Browser. under Graphics. and click Properties. 8 In the Views dialog box. right-click. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Callout of section 1. 18 Select the drag bar attached to the callout balloon.15 On the View Toolbar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify 3/4" = 1'. 17 Draw a box around the column of Garage Level 1. double-click S-2 Section Views. and zoom in on the lower floors of the structure. and click OK. click . 20 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Graphics. 24 Adjust the length of the title line by dragging the right end control until it fits under the view. right-click. click Callout. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Drag the title line under the elevation view. under Sections (Building Sections). and drag the view onto the sheet.0" for View Scale. and position it approximately as shown. under Sheets (all). 21 With the view selected. as shown. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets | 283 . 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

25 Click File menu ➤ Save. 284 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE If necessary. click Training Files. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Instead of having to draw these details for every project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Save_Detail. and double-click S. you begin by opening a project that contains common drafting view details.1 .TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Detail Library In this lesson. Save a group of views to the library 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to create a detail library of components that can be imported into different projects. you will learn how to save both the individual views and complete detail sheets as a new detail library and then import these details into a different project. expand Sheets (all). Creating a Detail Library on page 284. you can select the view title separately and move it to a new position. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Creating a Drafting View Detail Library | 285 . Enter Detail Library for the folder name. 4 In the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Locate a common drive that can be accessed by all team members. Click the icon to the right of Save In to create a new Folder. 2 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. 3 In the Save Views dialog. select Drawing Sheet: S.TYPICAL DETAILS.Notice there are 3 typical detail views on this sheet.1 . and click OK. Open the new folder.

■ ■ 7 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the Detail Library folder created in step 4. 286 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . Click Save. Save individual views to the library 5 Click File menu ➤ Save to Library ➤ Save Views. Click OK. select Show drafting views only. Click Save. do the following: ■ ■ In the list of views. however. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. 6 In the Save Views dialog. enter Footing Section. Under Views. Select both Footing Section views. enter Typical Column Beam and Girder Details. when you insert these views into a new project. NOTE When you save your file.1 . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Drawing Sheet: S. only the 2D elements will be inserted. For File name. Only the drafting views will be displayed. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. Importing Details from the Library on page 287.TYPICAL DETAILS.■ ■ Under File name. Revit Structure will save views that contain 3D objects.

a duplicate types dialog displays. click Training Files.TYPICAL DETAILS. Creating a Drafting View Detail Library on page 284 before proceeding. select the Detail Library folder you created in the previous exercise. Click OK.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Select Drawing Sheet: S. 2 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Look in.1 . close the warning dialog that appears. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Once the drawing sheet opens.Importing Details from the Library In this exercise. Importing Details from the Library | 287 . you learn how import details from the newly created library. Select the file TYPICAL COLUMN BEAM AND GIRDER DETAILS. and open Imperial\i_RST_Insert_Detail. Insert drawing sheet from the library 1 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Click OK. Click Open.rvt.

and double-click S.rvt. 8 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ Under Views. Select the file FOOTING SECTION. 7 In the Open dialog.1 . 288 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . expand Sheets (all). Insert separate footing sections from the library 6 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views.5 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. Click Open. select Drafting View: FOOTING SECTION.TYPICAL DETAILS. select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.

a duplicate types dialog appears. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. Click OK. Importing Details from the Library | 289 .■ Click OK.

9 Click File menu ➤ Insert from File ➤ Views. 290 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . select the folder Detail Library you created in the previous exercise.rvt. Select the file Footing Sections. 10 In the Open dialog: ■ ■ For Look in.

11 In the Insert Views dialog: ■ ■ Under Views. Click OK. Importing Details from the Library | 291 . Click OK. Because you are importing element types that may already exist in the project. select Drafting View: Footing Section 2. a duplicate types dialog appears.■ Click Open.

13 Proceed to the next lesson. Legends list and identify components such as weld symbols and rebar tags. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various structural components and annotations used in a project. Using Legends on page 292. component legends are often called schedules (beam schedule. Finally. You have created a library of common drafting details that can be shared by each member of the structural team. You have also imported both individual detail views as well as the entire detail sheet into an existing project.12 Click File menu ➤ Close. On construction documents. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. and so on). concrete schedule. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers which are paired with text that identifies them. using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 292 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . you add the completed symbol legend to a sheet for the construction documents. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it.

and click OK. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. i_RST_Drawings-in progress.rvt. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the drawing area as shown. enter Symbol Legend for Name. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Section Head . click Symbol. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Filled Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag Weld Symbol: Both Weld Symbol .Spacer: Spacer Weld Symbol-w-Preparation: Melt Thru Creating a Symbol Legend | 293 . expand Legends. and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

and click OK. On the Design Bar. enter 1/8" text for Name. and click OK twice. 294 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings . enter 1/8" for Text Size. 14 Enter Level Marker (Level Name/Elevation) or the text note. click Duplicate.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. select Text: 1/4" Arial text. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options bar. Add text to the legend 13 In the Type Selector. 12 Under Text. click . verify that Text: 1/8" text is selected. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. click Edit/New. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Text. 8 In the Type Selector.

click Symbol Legend.15 Working from the top down. 18 On the Design Bar.Spacer Weld Symbol .Melt thru Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 17 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 295 . and double-click S-1 . enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Span Direction Fixed: 1/2” Rebar Tag (Tag#) Weld Symbol Weld Symbol . expand Sheets (all).Plans and Elevations to open it in the drawing area. click Modify to end the command.

The symbol legend is added to the sheet. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. In the next tutorial, a new training file is supplied. 21 Proceed to the next tutorial, Scheduling on page 297.

296 | Chapter 7 Creating Drawings

Scheduling

8

In this tutorial, you learn how to create a customized schedule of structural framing elements in your Revit Structure 2009 projects.

Scheduling Beam Quantities
In this lesson, you learn how to create a beam schedule for the structural model as shown below. When you schedule structural components in Revit Structure, you can list each component as a separate line item (an instance schedule), or you can group components of the same type into a single line item (a type schedule).

Creating a Structural Framing Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a structural framing concrete beam schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Framing.rvt.

Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 2 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Structural Framing, and click OK. Choose which fields to include in the beam schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab.

297

4 Under Available fields, select Mark, and click Add. The Mark field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same process, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■

Comments Reference Level Family and Type

NOTE The width and depth parameters will be added to the schedule in the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click Add Parameter. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter REBAR for Name. Under Type of Parameter, select Text. Click OK.

NOTE Rebar is now a project parameter that can also be found in the properties of all structural framing components including beams. 8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. A schedule is created that includes all structural framing elements in the project.

298 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

10 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Shared Parameters on page 299.

Creating Shared Parameters
In this exercise you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional elements that are usually not included in the beam schedule when it is created within the project template. Shared parameters can be added to any family, regardless of category, and are defined and stored in an external file, ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Structure multi-category schedules. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add width and depth information in a concrete beam schedule. This requires assigning the existing width and depth parameters originally defined as family parameters to shared parameters in the beam family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters and adding them to a family. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules.rvt.

Editing the family parameters 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. NOTE Some beams have been added to this view to better demonstrate the scheduling tool. 2 Select one of the concrete beams as shown.

Creating Shared Parameters | 299

3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes when prompted about opening the beam for editing. NOTE You are now in the Family Editor. The selected beam family is displayed in the drawing area. 5 On the Family design bar, click Family Types. 6 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the b parameter, and click Modify.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 8 When asked if you want to choose a shared parameter file, click Yes. 9 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click Create. 10 In the Save As dialog, specify a location for the file, and enter Project Shared Parameters for name. Click Save. 11 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Groups, click New. 12 In the New Parameter Group dialog, enter Dimensions for name, and click OK. 13 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Under Name, enter b. Under Type of Parameter, select Length.

300 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

15 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, under Parameters, click New. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Name, enter h. Under Type of Parameter, select Length. Click OK.

17 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog, click OK. 18 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the b parameter, and click OK. 19 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 20 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, select the h parameter, and click Modify. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, select Shared Parameter, and click Select. 22 In the Shared Parameter dialog, select the h parameter, and click OK. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog, click OK. NOTE The b and h parameters, which were originally family parameters, are now shared parameters. They will appear in the structural framing schedule field once they are reloaded into the project file. 25 On the Family design bar, click Load into Project. 26 When prompted to overwrite the existing version of the family, click Yes. Remove Family and Type parameter 27 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click Structural Framing Schedule, and select Properties. 28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog, under Scheduled fields (in order), select Family and Type, and click Remove. The Family and Type field is removed from the Scheduled fields column. Add depth and width parameters to the beam schedule 30 Under Available Fields, select b (Width) and h (Depth), and click Add. The b and h fields are moved under Scheduled fields. 31 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

Creating Shared Parameters | 301

32 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 35 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating a Type Schedule on page 302.

Creating a Type Schedule
In this exercise, you learn how to create a type schedule. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom.rvt.

Modify the table elements 1 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, double-click Structural Framing Schedule. 2 Modify the schedule headings as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Mark, and enter MARK. Select b (Width), and enter W. Select h (Depth), and enter D. Select Comments, and enter REMARKS. Select the title, and enter GROUND LEVEL CONCRETE BEAM SCHEDULE.

NOTE Under the Project Browser, click Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name has changed. 3 Select headings W and D. 4 On the Options bar, click Group.

302 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

A new blank cell is created above columns W and D. 5 Click the new heading, and enter SIZE.

Select a filter 6 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Filter, click Edit. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Filter tab. Select Reference Level for Filter by. Select Ground Level. Click OK.

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is filtered and shows only the structural framing elements of the ground level.

Format units 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Formatting tab. 13 Under Fields, click b, and click Field Format. 14 In the Format dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Clear Use project settings. Under Units, select Fractional inches. Under Rounding, select To the nearest 1/2".

Creating a Type Schedule | 303

Click OK.

15 Using the same method, format units for field h. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Columns W and D now display fractional inches.

Add structural usage parameter to the beam schedule 18 In the Project Browser, under Schedules/Quantities, right-click the Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule, and select Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 21 Under Available Fields, select Structural Usage, and click Add. The Structural usage is moved under Scheduled fields. 22 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

304 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

23 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule now displays the structural usage of each item.

Sort by Structural Usage 25 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog ➤ Sorting/Grouping tab, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sort by, select Structural Usage. Select Header. Select Footer.

Creating a Type Schedule | 305

■ ■

Select Blank Line. Click OK.

28 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The schedule is updated to provide both a header and footer for each type, sorted by structural usage.

29 Click File menu ➤ Close. To save changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the exercise file without saving changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise, Customizing the Type Schedule on page 307.

306 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Customizing the Type Schedule
In this exercise, you first add mark information to identify each beam type, you then sort the schedule by mark, hide specific columns, and finally, you add rebar information. Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Custom_Type.rvt.

Add mark data 1 In the Project Browser, under Structural Plans, double-click Ground Level. 2 On the Window menu, click Tile. The screen is split into two separate windows, showing both the beam schedule and Ground Level view. NOTE Close any additional views that may be opened. If prompted to save the changes to the beam family, click Yes, and provide a location for the new family file. 3 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

4 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

5 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B1 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 307

6 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

7 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

8 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B2 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

308 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

9 While pressing CTRL, select multiple joists on the Ground Level window as shown.

10 On the Options bar, click
■ ■

.

11 In the Element Properties dialog, do the following: Under Identity Data, enter B3 for Mark Value. Click OK.

NOTE Ignore the warning regarding elements having duplicate Mark values. The schedule is updated with the joist information.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 309

Sort and filter the schedule by mark 12 Maximize the schedule window. 13 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and select View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog, under Sorting/Grouping, click Edit for Value. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■

Clear Footer, Header, Itemize every instance, and Grand totals. Under Sort by, select Mark.

16 In the Schedules Properties dialog, click the Filter tab, and do the following:

Under Filter by, select Mark, then select contains, and enter B.

310 | Chapter 8 Scheduling

Click OK.

17 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. Notice the schedule is not itemized and does not show each beam, but instead groups all the beams of the same mark in a single row.

Hide/unhide columns 18 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Fields, select Reference Level. Under Field Formatting, select Hidden field. Click OK.

21 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. The Reference Level column is now hidden. NOTE To show all hidden columns, right-click the open area next to the schedule, select Unhide All Columns. You can also hide a column by right-clicking the desired column, and selecting Hide Column(s) from the drop-down menu. Rename existing rebar parameter 22 Right-click the open area next to the schedule, and click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Formatting, click Edit for Value.

Customizing the Type Schedule | 311

312 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Click OK. click OK. and click View Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Rebar will not be added to the model with the data entered in this dialog. click Add Parameter. The new rebar field is added. click OK. click Edit for Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. order the fields as shown by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. 30 Under Scheduled fields. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. This parameter provides text information that is added to all beams within the model. Click OK. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select REBAR.24 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Type of Parameter. The Rebar field is renamed. Under Heading. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Fields. Add new rebar parameter 26 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. under Fields. enter Top Bars for Name. select Text. enter Bottom Bars. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

enter 2-#5 C. and enter REBAR. and under Top Bars. 2 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. click Edit for Value. Creating an Instance Schedule In this exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. click Training Files. The schedule is updated with the joist information. click Group.rvt. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Schedules/Quantities. under Bottom Bars. select 2-#5C. For Joists B3. you create a formula to calculate the unit cost for each joist instance. Enter rebar data 36 Enter the following rebar set information for each rebar instance as follows: ■ ■ ■ For Joists B1. 34 On the Options bar. and under Top Bars. under the Fields parameter. 35 Click the new heading. under Bottom Bars. enter 2-#6A 1-#6B. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the formula 1 In the Project Browser. as well as the total cost of all structural items for the ground level of the structure. A new blank cell is created above the columns. enter 2-#5A 1-#5B. under Bottom Bars. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. For Joists B2. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Formula. click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click Ground Level Concrete Beam Schedule. enter 2-#7A 1-#7B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Instance Schedule | 313 . To save changes. Creating an Instance Schedule on page 313. and under Top Bars.Group rebar columns 33 Select both the Bottom Bars and Top Bars headings. and click View Properties. select2-#5C. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click Add. select Volume. The schedule will calculate the total cost for all joists. 314 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Select Number for Type. click OK. and click Add. and press ENTER. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Under Joist B1. 6 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Enter Volume*Cost/1'^3 for Formula. Note that the formula will calculate the total cost based on a volume unit of 1 cubic yard. Because cost is a type parameter. enter 3 for Cost. ■ Click OK. Under Available Fields. Click Calculated Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Available Fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. select Cost. 5 In the Calculated Value dialog. click OK.4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the value will be applied to all elements of the same type.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Format dialog. select $. 9 Under Joist B2. Under Units. Under Rounding. select Total Cost. Under Unit Symbol. select Calculate totals. under Formatting. select Total Cost. Under Field Formatting. Also notice that the Total Cost parameter does not have a unit value assigned. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE The cost value represents a random value chosen for demonstration purposes only. Click OK. Format total cost to include currency value 14 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. select Currency. 16 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click OK. Under Fields. clear Use default settings. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 10 Right-click the open area next to the schedule. enter 1. and press ENTER. The schedule now includes the sum for Total Cost. click Edit for Value. click Edit for Value. click Field Format. Creating an Instance Schedule | 315 .5 for Cost. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. Under Fields. select 2 Decimal Places. under Formatting. Under Field formatting.

The Total Cost column displays a currency value in Dollars. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog.rvt. 316 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . you learn how to create a graphical column schedule for the current project. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click OK. click File menu ➤ Save As. click OK. Create the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise you learn how to create a graphical column schedule. 20 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule on page 316. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. To save changes. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Create_GCS. Creating a Graphical Column Schedule In this lesson. The next lesson uses a new training file.■ Click OK.

1. select Foundation. and Ground Level. 6 On the Toolbar. The schedule is created automatically. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and zoom in on the schedule. Notice that the first level on the schedule is Level 2. click Edit for Hidden Levels. under Other. 4 In the Levels Hidden dialog. and select View Properties. NOTE These levels will not appear on the graphical column schedule. and click OK. click OK. 2 Right-click the column schedule. click Graphical Column Schedule. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 317 . Garage Level .Create the schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Columns located at off-grid locations 318 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . The schedule also provides the nearest grid intersection and the value for the offset distance between the grid and column.NOTE The graphical column schedule includes columns located at off-grid locations as shown below.

click Edit. under Vertical Heights. click OK. select Group Similar Locations.Columns displayed in plan view Grouping and formatting off-grid columns 7 Right-click the schedule. and click OK. ■ In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that all columns located at off-grid locations are now grouped together under a single column. and select View Properties. and for Grid Appearance. for Below Bottom Level. Create the Graphical Column Schedule | 319 . enter 3". enter 3". 8 In the Element Properties dialog. For Column Locations. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. under Horizontal Widths.

To save changes. 9 Right-click the schedule. Change the Schedule Appearance In this exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Edit for Value. click File menu ➤ Save As. 320 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Notice the schedule view only displays those columns located at grid intersections. and save the exercise file with a unique name.Include/Exclude columns at off-grid locations In the graphical column schedule view. and select View Properties. Change the Schedule Appearance on page 320. and then select Bold and Italic. click Training Files. The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 Right-click the schedule. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under Graphical Column Schedules. double-click Graphical Column Schedule 1. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Customize_GCS. or close the exercise file without saving changes. under Text Appearance.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. clear both Include Off-Grid Columns and Group Similar Locations. Customize text 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Graphical Column Schedule Properties dialog. you can include or exclude columns located at off-grid locations. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Graphics. and then select Bold. do the following: ■ ■ For Title text. and select View Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Arial Black from the drop-down list. you learn how to add a title to the schedule and how to customize text and graphic appearance. For Level text. select Courier New from the drop-down list. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Steel Column Schedule for Title. 7 Click OK. 9 Click OK.5 Click the Grid Appearance tab. 6 Under Horizontal Widths: ■ ■ Enter 2" for Column Locations. Enter 2" for Level Names. under Identity Data. Change the Schedule Appearance | 321 .

click . Click OK. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 11 On the Options bar. 322 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . click Tag ➤ By Category.Tag the columns 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Click any column on Level 7 to place the tag. and clear Leader. 15 Enter ZF to fit the entire column schedule in the drawing area. Click Apply. click Vertical. Under Orientation. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Structural Column Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Vertical. 13 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Structural Columns. 16 Draw a pick box around the entire schedule. 17 On the Options bar. 18 In the Filter dialog.

and select View Properties. and move the tags until they are positioned approximately as shown. and zoom in on one of the column tags. Change the Schedule Appearance | 323 . .19 On the Toolbar. click 20 On the Toolbar. Split the column schedule 21 Right-click the schedule. click .

24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name.0". click ■ ■ ■ . ■ ■ Under View Scale. click Modify. 324 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . enter Steel Column Schedule. The schedule is split into multiple segments with 10 column locations per segment. 3 In the Project Browser. enter 10. To save changes. The next exercise uses a new training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. and select the titleblock. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Multiple_Sheets_GCS. click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser. click Training Files. 5 On the Options bar. A titleblock and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Under Column Locations per Segment. Click OK. you create multiple sheets for the graphical column schedule. enter 1/4" = 1' . enter S-3. and click OK. do the following. Under Sheet Number. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Sheet. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule on page 324.

select Steel Column Schedule. enter 1 for Segments in Viewport. under Extents. and on the Options Bar. 17 Repeat previous steps to add 2 additional sheets. and select the titleblock. Click OK. enter S-4. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the view. select Graphical Column Schedule. and click Add View to Sheet. Under Sheet Number. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal: E1 30x42 Horizontal. Add the column schedule to the sheet 7 On the View tab of the Design bar. expand Sheets (all). 15 On the Options bar. click . and enter S-5 and S-6 for sheet numbers. do the following: Under Identity Data ➤ Sheet Name. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Multiple Sheets for the Graphical Column Schedule | 325 . Place remaining views 18 On the Project Browser. 8 In the Views dialog. click Add View. click OK. 13 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 10 Select the schedule. and double-click Sheet S-4. 9 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. Add additional sheets 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.The sheet name and number are displayed in the titleblock and in the Project Browser. The first segment will be placed on Sheet S-3. Enter Steel Column Schedule for name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . click Sheet.

and drag it onto the sheet. 25 On the Project Browser. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compliant database. 10 When the confirmation message displays. click Graphical Column Schedule 1.rvt. and click to place the view. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and double-click Sheet S-6. click Training Files. and then open the database in Microsoft Access. 20 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click OK. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. and double-click Sheet S-5 23 On the Project Browser. 21 Position the schedule as necessary. 22 On the Project Browser. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click Create. 8 In the New Database dialog. enter Revit_Project. under Database Name. expand Sheets (all).19 On the Project Browser.mdb. under Database. and click to place the view. under Graphical Column Schedule. under Graphical Column Schedule. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. under Graphical Column Schedule. 24 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click to place the view. 3 Click New. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 26 On the Project Browser. and click Next. and open Imperial\i_RST_Schedules_Export_Project_Info. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Graphical Column Schedule 1. 27 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet. click OK. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access on page 326. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. expand Sheets (all). 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 Click File menu ➤ Close. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and drag it onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Under Directories. and click OK to create the database. and drag it onto the sheet. click the File Data Source tab. 326 | Chapter 8 Scheduling . Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. Export the schedule 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ ODBC Database. and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. select a location for the database file. 6 Click Finish.

click File menu ➤ Save As. instance tables include a Type ID column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 327 . For example. Steel Details on page 329. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. so that each table of elements includes an ID column. and some instance tables include a Room ID column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. To save changes.Revit Structure creates 2 tables: one that lists all of the element instances in a project. The next tutorial uses a new training file. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Proceed to the next tutorial. and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below).

328 .

2 Select . Structural Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). Detail drawings describe how particular pieces of the structure go together and are typically created in the middle to later portion of the design process after the general building shape and structural elements have been decided upon. revise an existing elevation view. Prepare the welded brace elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to create steel details from the structural model (model-based). and open Imperial\i_RST_DET. You cut a section in plan. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and draw a zoom box around the northwest stair opening as shown. you begin with a framed model as the basis of your details. click Training Files. and double-click Level 4. 329 . This tutorial comprises the following model-based steel detail exercises: ■ ■ ■ Welded Brace Connection Bolted Angle Connection Glazing Support Connection Setting Up Section Views on Sheets In this lesson. and how to create a drafting detail using the tools provided (drafting-detail). revise a callout view.Steel Details 9 In this tutorial.rvt. and add these views to a sheet.

and draw a zoom box around grid line intersection 1-E. under Structural Plans. Create the section view 6 In the Project Browser.0". Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Section. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select 3/4" =1' . 7 Select . double-click Level 4. select the elevation crop view.3 Double-click the elevation bubble to open the elevation view. 5 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 4 In the elevation view. 330 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and drag the controls to resize such that only the Level 4 area is visible.

0". A callout symbol is located in this view at the south wall. click Modify. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 11 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and zoom in on the south wall at Level 4. 12 Select the section crop view. 13 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and select 1/2" =1' . Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Revise the callout view 14 In the Project Browser. Cutting Sections and Adding Views to Sheets | 331 . double-click West Elevation. and drag the view controls so that only Level 4 is visible.9 Draw a section as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Select . 16 Double-click on the callout head to open the view. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

23 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Views dialog. and callout views on the sheet 18 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Sheets (all). 332 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . and click to place the view. 22 In the Sheet Title dialog. 30 In the Views dialog. select E1 30x42 Horizontal. 26 In the Project Browser. and select 3/4" =1' . and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Callout of West Elevation. select Elevation: Elevation 1-a. 25 Move the cursor onto the sheet. elevation. and click OK. 31 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. and click Add View. right-click S-6 . and click to place the view. 20 In the Project Browser.0". Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 27 In the Views dialog. enter Steel Details for Name. and click Rename. select Section: Section 1. 19 In the Select a Title block dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK. 21 Right-click S-6 Unnamed.Steel Details.Steel Details. and click to place the view. right-click S-6 .Steel Details. and click Add View. right-click S-6 . Create a sheet and place the section. 28 Move the cursor onto the sheet. and click Add View.17 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. and click Add View to Sheet.

and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_DET-in progress. click braces meet at Level 4. Detailing Steel on page 333.rvt. .rvt. you add a welded bracing detail. You will sketch the lines in a model view. Sketch line work 1 In the Project Browser. a bolted angle detail. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Creating a Welded Bracing Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double click Elevation 1-a.32 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the midpoint of the beam where the Detailing Steel | 333 . i_RST_DET-in progress. The first part of the exercise involves adding a plate to the underside of a beam to support the bracing. 2 On the Toolbar. and a facade support detail to the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Detailing Steel In this lesson.

334 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 6 Sketch a vertical line down 1' -1 3/8" from the bottom flange as shown. 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.3 Select the left brace. TIP After establishing the line direction. and drag the shape handle (two small triangles at the brace end) to move the brace so it is not touching the beam flange. and enter SM to snap to the midpoint. 5 Place the cursor near the bottom flange of the beam. click Detail Lines. enter the value.

14 Place the cursor on the bottom flange of the beam as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Place the cursor near the vertical line to highlight it. 10 Click to place this line. 13 On the Options Bar. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 335 . click Offset. click . you create 2 detail lines that are offset from this vertical line. and select Copy. click Detail Lines. A line displays that is offset from the highlighted line. select Numerical. 11 Repeat the same steps to place a vertical line on the opposite side. enter 2' 6" for Offset. 7 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and enter 1' 8" for the Offset value. and click to place the detail line.Next.

336 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 16 Enter 3' 9" for the temporary dimension value as shown. and sketch 2 detail lines to connect the horizontal line to the vertical lines as shown. 17 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and select the horizontal detail line.

expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ Select Both. click the left top weld annotation. and select the weld symbol.18 Select the middle vertical line that you used as a reference line. drag it into the view as shown. and press DELETE to delete this element. click Modify. Add weld symbols 19 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 Click Modify. click Add a Leader. and enter 3/8. Repeat for the left bottom value. 25 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 22 Click the right top weld annotation. and click to place it. 24 On the Options Bar. The weld symbol has 4 numerical parameters that are currently set to 0. and enter a period. Repeat for the right bottom value. Creating a Welded Bracing Detail | 337 . 21 Select the weld symbol.

27 Right-click the new weld symbol. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Graphics. select Weld Contour-Empty for Top Symbol.26 Use the same technique to add another weld symbol as shown. and click Properties. select Weld All Around. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Structural. 338 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Click OK.

you add 2 angles to the model using an angle family that has been loaded into the project. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. click . TYPICAL for text as shown. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail on page 339. 33 On the Options Bar. under Sections. i_RST_DET-in progress. 34 Draw a leader to the brace and enter L8x8. 32 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. 30 On the Options Bar. In the first part of the exercise. click . 31 Draw a text leader to the plate. 1 In the Project Browser.Label the angles and the plate 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. Then you add some annotations. click Text. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail | 339 . and enter 3/8" PL for text. Creating a Bolted Angle Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

click Text. click Detail Lines.2 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. click . Add annotations 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 340 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 3 Drag the family onto the grid line in the view as shown. select L4x4x5/16. under Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ L-Angle-Bolted Connection Section. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a vertical line through the center of the left set of bolts as shown.

Creating a Facade Support Detail Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Elevations (Building Elevation).8 Enter the text notes as shown. double-click West Elevation. click Level 4 at Grid 4. 2 On the Toolbar. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and draw a zoom box around the callout at the intersection on Creating a Facade Support Detail | 341 . 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Facade Support Detail on page 341. . you add members to support exterior wall glazing.rvt. i_RST_DET-in progress. In this exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

7 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the channel twice. and select the left side of the column as shown.3 Double-click the callout head to open Callout of West Elevation. 342 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 6 Click Modify and select the channel. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ C-Channel Section. On the right side of the view is an imported symbol that represents a curtain wall.7. click . 4 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. select C5x6. You will attach a channel in section to the outrigger for use as a member of the facade support system. 5 Drag the channel onto the drawing area. 8 On the Edit toolbar. move it to the position shown.

9 Next. 10 Continue to use the align tool to align the channel to the bottom of the outrigger as shown. Creating a Facade Support Detail | 343 . select the back of the channel as shown.

A325 BOLT. click Text. expand Families ➤ Detail Items ➤ Bolt-Section. double-click S-6 Steel Detail to view the results of your work in the sheet view. a new training file is supplied. you learn how to create a drafting view detail for a deck span transition using the drafting tools provided in Revit Structure. 14 Click near the bolt and enter 3/4" DIA. 344 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . Add annotations 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and drag it onto the outrigger and channel as shown. under Sheets. Creating a Drafting View Detail In this lesson. You can save the open file if you wish. 16 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drafting View Detail on page 344.7.11 In the Project Browser. select the bolt. 15 Press ESC twice to exit the Text tool. In the next lesson. 18 Proceed to the next lesson. 13 Click the open area outside of the channel and enter C5x6. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close.

enter Typical Detail .0". Load detail components 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. Align the bottom of the joist seat with the top of the beam as shown. Create the drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Under Scale. 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design bar. select AISC Wide Flange Shapes . select K-Series Bar Joist . 5 In the Type Selector. 9 In the Type Selector. select 1 1/2" = 1' . click Modify. click Training Files. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Name. 10 Position the joist on the right side of the beam. Click OK.Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Deck Span Transition. 2 In the New Drafting dialog. expand Drafting Views. and open Imperial\i_RST_Deck_Span_Detail. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 345 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Side: 14K3.rvt.Section: W18x35.Deck Span Transition. select Detail Component. 6 Click the drawing area to place the component. select Detail Component. and double-click Typical Detail . click Drafting View. 11 On the Design bar. click Modify.

15 Move the pointer to the right to begin placing the deck. click Modify.125. 20 Place the tube on the top flange of the steel beam directly next to the end of the joist seat as shown. 19 In the Type Selector.5 WR 22. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Roof Decking-Side: 1. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Click the end of the joist. and continue to move the pointer to the right until the deck is drawn as shown.Section: HSS2-1/2x2-1/2x. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 Align the bottom of the decking with the top of the joist and move the deck to the left approximately as shown. select Detail Component. 23 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design bar. click Modify. select Repeating Detail : Metal Deck. 21 On the Design bar. 16 Press the SPACEBAR to rotate the orientation of the deck. 346 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . select Repeating Detail.12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Detail Component. select AISC Tube Shapes .

Enter 2 @ 12 for Bottom Weld Length. drag it into the view as shown. Click OK. select Field Weld. click Modify. 29 On the Design bar. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the weld symbol. click Modify. expand Families ➤ Annotation Symbols ➤ Weld Symbol ➤ select the bottom. Enter 3/16" for Bottom Weld Size. and click to place it. and select Symbol Right. 27 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 28 Place the joist to the left of the beam. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Add weld symbols 30 In the Project Browser. change the following instance parameters: Under Structural. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 347 . and align the top of the joist with the bottom of the deck as shown. select Detail Component. click ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select K-Series Bar Joist-Section: 14K3.25 On the Design bar. clear Symbol Left. Under Other. click Modify.

40 On the Design bar. 38 On the Options Bar. click .34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 348 | Chapter 9 Steel Details . 36 Drag the leader arrowhead to the position as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. and select the weld symbol. click Add a Leader. click Text. click Text. Add text to the detail view 37 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 41 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text leader to the steel deck and enter STL DECK SEE PLAN for text. 42 Repeat the previous steps to add the remaining text and leader to the detail view as shown.

and navigate to a folder location of your choice. Creating a Deck Span Transition Detail | 349 . Concrete Reinforcement Modelling on page 351.43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 44 Proceed to the next tutorial.

350 .

you model reinforcement in a concrete beam. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. you learn how to model reinforcement using the sketching tools and rebar library provided with Revit Structure. 351 .Concrete Reinforcement Modelling 10 In this tutorial. Each exercise shows how specific reinforcement elements are built while demonstrating the modelling capabilities of Revit Structure. This tutorial comprises the following concrete reinforcement modelling exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Reinforcement in a Beam Reinforcement in a Column Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Area Reinforcement in a Slab Path Reinforcement in a Slab Sketching Reinforcement in a Footing Sketching Reinforcement in a Structural Wall Concrete Modelling Examples In this lesson. Reinforcement in a Beam In this exercise. you learn how to use Revit Structure 2009 to model concrete reinforcement from the structural project.

click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. click Training Files. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. positioned to the right of the drawing area. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Detail Views (Detail).rvt. double-click Beam Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf. 2 On the Toolbar. 352 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and draw a pick box around the section view of the beam located in the center of the drawing area. click . The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar.

5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. Place rebar parallel to the beam face 4 In the Type Selector. Reinforcement in a Beam | 353 . scroll down the list of available shapes. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. 7 Click the bottom edge of the beam to place the rebar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different beam edge. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. and select Rebar Shape: S3.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. 6 Hover over the section view. For training purposes. select Rebar Bar: #4.

13 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. 14 Place 2 rebar in the detail view. 16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 354 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . click Modify. Set rebar spacing 11 Select the rebar shapes that you placed in the previous steps. 10 On the Design Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. and on the Options Bar. scroll down the list of available shapes. 15 On the Design Bar. and select Rebar Shape: 01. scroll down the list of available shapes. click Modify. approximately as shown. Place rebar perpendicular to the beam face 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. and select Rebar Shape: T9. For Spacing. 9 Click the top edge of the view to place the rebar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. select Maximum Spacing. 17 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser.8 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. enter 0’ 6”. and select Rebar Shape: 01.

For Quantity. Reinforcement in a Beam | 355 . Set rebar visibility 22 Draw a pick box to select the rebar as shown. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 4. click Modify. select Fixed Number. and on the Options Bar. Set rebar spacing 20 Select the single rebar that you just placed. 21 On the Design Bar. For Layout. approximately as shown. select Rebar Bar: #6.18 Pace a single rebar at the bottom of the detail view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size.

select both View unobscured and View as solid. and draw a zoom box around the beam as shown 356 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 25 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. click . select Detail Level: Fine. and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. under 3D Views. under Graphics.23 On the Options Bar. for 3D View. click . double-click 3D. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 28 On the View Control Bar. click Edit for View Visibility States. 30 On the Toolbar. View rebar in 3D 27 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the rebar sets are visible. click 32 Select the rebar as shown. . Modify the rebar length 31 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the end of the beam. Reinforcement in a Beam | 357 .

358 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .33 Click and drag the rebar shape handles to change the length of the rebar as required. Reinforcement in a Column on page 359. To save changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The next exercise uses a new training file. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. or close the exercise file without saving changes. 35 Proceed to the next exercise.

Reinforcement in a Column In this exercise. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. Open detail view 1 In the Project Browser. The active rebar shape is highlighted and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. positioned to the right of the drawing area. and draw a pick box around the section view of the column located in the center of the drawing area. 2 On the Toolbar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. Launch the rebar shape browser 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. under Detail Views (Detail). click Training Files. Reinforcement in a Column | 359 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. using the Revit Structure rebar shapes library. double-click Column Detail. you model reinforcement in a concrete column. and open Imperial\i_RST_Concrete_Reinf.

Place rebar parallel to the column face 4 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. and select Rebar Shape: T1. 7 Click the bottom edge of the column to place the rebar as shown. select Maximum Spacing. enter 0’ 3”. the Rebar Shape Library is already loaded in this training file. scroll down the list of available shapes. 6 Hover over the section view. 5 Click in the Rebar Shape Browser. The library is located in the Rebar Shapes folder in the Imperial Library. For Spacing. click Modify.NOTE You can open or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking on the Options Bar. Notice that the rebar shape changes as you select a different column edge. Set rebar spacing 9 Select the rebar that you just placed. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. For Layout. For training purposes. 360 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Rebar Bar: #4. select Rebar Bar: #4. 8 On the Design Bar.

12 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. as shown. Reinforcement in a Column | 361 . Place rebar perpendicular to the column face 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. scroll down the list of available shapes.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Copy the rebar 16 Select the rebar. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Rebar Size. click (Copy). 13 Click to place a single rebar as shown. 18 Click the rebar centerline as the copy starting point. select Rebar Bar: #8. and select Rebar Shape: 00. 15 On the Design Bar. For Quantity. click Modify. enter 3. select Fixed Number. Set rebar spacing 14 Select the single rebar. For Layout.

20 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor to the opposite side of the column to select the copy end point as shown. Set rebar visibility 21 Select the rebar in the detail view as shown. click Modify. 362 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

and draw a zoom box around the column as shown Reinforcement in a Column | 363 . under Graphics. click OK. 29 On the Toolbar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.22 On the Options Bar. click . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. for 3D View. click Edit for View Visibility States. 28 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible. select both View unobscured and View as solid. select Detail Level: Fine. and click OK. click . View rebar in 3D 26 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click 3D. 27 On the View Control Bar.

rvt. 30 Click File menu ➤ Close. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise.Notice that the rebar sets are visible. 31 Proceed to the next exercise. 364 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 364. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you model area reinforcement in a structural wall. click Training Files. or close the exercise file without saving changes. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The next exercise uses a new training file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As.

select the crop view. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . double-click Garage Level-1. 2 On the Toolbar. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 365 . 7 In the section view.Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans. select 3/4" = 1' . Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and draw a zoom box around the upper north wall of the structure.0" for Scale. 5 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the north wall of the structure as shown. click Section.

double-click 3D. 366 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 Select the foundation wall. 9 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

and trace the outline of the foundation wall as shown. click (Sketch Area Reinforcement) to enter sketch mode. The foundation wall will be highlighted as shown below. click Lines. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 367 . 11 On the Options Bar.10 Use the ViewCube to rotate the model so the north side of the structure is visible. 12 On the Design Bar.

on the Design Bar. The area reinforcement is automatically applied to the selected foundation wall. adjacent to the major bars. click Major Direction Edge. 14 In the Project Browser. Bars will be placed parallel to the major direction near both wall faces. double-click Section 3. 13 On the Design Bar. To change the major direction. and is indicated on the 3D view with an X as shown. Minor bars will be placed perpendicular (inside position) to the major bars (outside position). click Finish Sketch.NOTE The 2 short lines adjacent to the vertical line of the outline represent the rebar major direction. under Sections (Building Sections). 368 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and select one of the horizontal lines of the outline.

Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 369 .The area reinforcement for the foundation wall is displayed. Remove the major bars 15 Select the area reinforcement.

17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. click .Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at the base of the reinforcement. clear the values for Exterior Major Direction and Interior Major Direction. under Layers. 370 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

enter 30. and that the minor bars move out to the clear cover setting for the wall. under Construction. enter 30. For Exterior Minor Number of Lines. For Interior Major Number of Lines. enter 30. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. for Value. select Fixed Number. Change the number of rebar for the exterior and interior layers 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Layers. and click OK.Notice the rebar for the major span direction of the foundation wall is deleted from the section view. Click OK. Area Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 371 . For Interior Minor Number of Lines. Reselect Interior Major Direction and Exterior Major Direction. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Exterior Major Number of Lines. enter 30.

Change bar type 21 Select the Area Reinforcement. 27 On the Design Bar. 372 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and click Zoom to Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. change all Bar Types to #4. and click OK. under Layers. click Add annotation 24 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. click Modify. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.Notice that additional bars are added to the section view. 26 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. . move the area reinforcement tag approximately as shown. 28 Using the drag control. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 373 . To save changes. Area Reinforcement in a Slab on page 373. you model area reinforcement in a concrete slab. and open Imperial\i_RST_Area_Reinf_Slab. click File menu ➤ Save As. and draw a zoom box around the circular foundation on the north side of the structure as shown. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 2 On the Toolbar. double-click Garage Level-1. The next exercise uses a new training file. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Training Files.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Area Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. under Structural Plans. click . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or close the exercise file without saving changes.

and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the concrete slab on Garage Level-1 is shown. 4 Add a section line that cuts through the circular foundation as shown. select Shading w/Edges. 6 On the View Control Bar. For Detail Level. click Section. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. 374 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1/4" = 1' . For Model Graphics Style. select Fine. select the crop view.0". 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 7 In the section view.

10 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the concrete slab as shown. click .Sketch the area reinforcement 8 In the Project Browser. to enter sketch mode. 11 Using the line tool. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 375 . double-click Garage Level -1. draw an area reinforcement box as shown. under Structural Plans.

13 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . under Sections (Building Sections).12 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 4. click Finish Sketch.

and on the Options Bar. under Layers. click . click . select Attached End. Change the area reinforcement properties 14 Select the area reinforcement. 23 Select the rebar tag. move the rebar tag approximately as shown. Notice the graphical controls to toggle the hook orientation appear at each end of the area reinforcement. and click OK. Change bar type 17 On the Options Bar. under Layers. click Modify. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the bars in the top major direction are deleted from the section view. 21 Click the area reinforcement to place the tag. Add annotation 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The area reinforcement for the slab is displayed. click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. change all Bar Types to #4. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Top Major Direction. Area Reinforcement in a Slab | 377 . 24 Using the drag control. click Tag ➤ By Category.

To save changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 378 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Structural Plans. 4 Select the slab opening. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab on page 378. and open Imperial\i_RST_Path_Reinf.25 Click File menu ➤ Close. you model path reinforcement in a concrete slab. The next exercise uses a new training file. You are now in sketch mode. or close the exercise file without saving changes. double-click Level 3. click Training Files. Path Reinforcement in a Slab In this exercise. click . click Rebar ➤ Sketch Path Reinforcement. click File menu ➤ Save As. Sketch the path reinforcement 1 In the Project Browser. and draw a zoom box around the slab opening on the north side of the structure as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.

and enter 1' 0" for Offset.5 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw a path reinforcement box approximately as shown. click . The path reinforcement for the slab opening is displayed. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. Change bar type 9 Select the Path Reinforcement. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. NOTE The lines you sketch for the path reinforcement box cannot intersect and must not form a closed loop. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 379 .

and click OK. click Modify. for Primary Bar . 380 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Add a section line that cuts through the slab opening as shown.0". 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the section view. select the crop view. select Fine. under Layers. 14 On the Design Bar. click Section. select 1/4" = 1' . click Create a section view . 15 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Shading w/Edges. For Detail Level. For Model Graphics Style. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale.Type.10 On the Options Bar. and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the edge of the opening in the slab and the path reinforcement on Level 3 is shown. select #4.

move the rebar tag approximately as shown. click Tag ➤ By Category. 20 Click the toggle control to change the rebar hook type as shown.NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. 22 Click the path reinforcement to place the tag. 23 On the Design Bar. Notice the toggle hook orientation icon appears. and on the Options Bar. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. and draw a zoom box around the edge of the slab opening. Change rebar properties 18 On the Toolbar. select Free End. click 19 Select the rebar. . click Modify. 25 Using the drag control. Add annotation 21 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Path Reinforcement in a Slab | 381 . 24 Select the rebar tag.

To save changes. double-click Ground Level. 382 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and open Imperial\i_RST_Footing_Detail. The next exercise uses a new training file. 2 On the Toolbar.rvt. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a concrete footing. draw a pick box. click Training Files. and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 Click the section line. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing on page 382. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown.26 Click File menu ➤ Close. click File menu ➤ Save As. Open section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing In this exercise. or close the exercise file without saving changes. . under Structural Plans. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the upper drag bar as shown. click structure.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 383 . and draw a zoom box around the wall footing as shown. click .4 Press ESC. 5 Double-click the section bubble. Add wall keys at the bottom of wall 6 On the Toolbar. The Section 1 view opens.

NOTE For training purposes. Model Graphics Style is set to Shading w/Edges (on the View Control Bar). 384 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Sketch 3 lines as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the boundary between the wall and footing. select Chain. 7 On the Toolbar. and click (Line). click (Draw). 10 On the Design Bar. click (Edit Cut Profile). select Boundary between faces.

Sketch rebar parallel to the footing and wall 18 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sketch. click Finish Sketch. click Sketch. The Design Bar changes to sketch mode. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 385 . click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 20 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 21 Sketch a rebar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor into the wall as shown. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. 19 On the Options Bar.Sketch rebar parallel to the footing 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Press ESC. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Sketch a straight bar by clicking inside the footing first and then moving the cursor to the right as shown. 14 Select the continuous footing as the host element. 17 On the Sketch tab.

and click Element Properties. 26 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Rebar only contributes to the estimated reinforcement volume of its host. select Standard .90 deg. 386 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . for Hook At Start. Add hook 24 Right-click the rebar you added in the previous steps.NOTE Be sure to sketch from the footing to the wall. This rebar will not be included in rebar estimates of the structural wall. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Press ESC. under Construction. 23 On the Sketch tab.

Mirror the rebar 27 On the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar: #8. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 387 . (Mirror). Place rebar perpendicular 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Select the end of the straight bar. 30 In the Type Selector. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. and place the pointer between the hooked and straight bars approximately as shown. click wall. and select the center reference plane of the structural 28 Click to place the rebar.

36 On the Options Bar. 388 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . select Minimum Clear Spacing. 32 Click to place the first rebar as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. Place rebar set 34 Select the single rebar. 38 Drag the shape handles so the rebar set aligns with the end of the horizontal rebar as shown. click Modify.Notice the footing cover settings display when placing the rebar. 37 Select the rebar set. For Spacing. enter 4". do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. 35 Press the SPACEBAR to change the direction of rebar placement.

Notice the default rebar cover settings are displayed in the section view as dotted lines. click (Edit Rebar Cover). Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 389 . 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify.39 On the Design Bar. click 42 Select the footing. Set rebar cover by element 40 On the Toolbar. (Pick Elements).

390 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Set rebar cover by face 45 On the Toolbar. enter 0' 2". enter Exposed/Cast against Earth.43 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. For Description. Notice that the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 47 Select the face of the structural wall. . For Setting. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Edit Cover Settings). (Pick Faces). click 46 On the Options Bar. do the following: Click Add. Click OK.

Notice the rebar cover has changed to the new setting. 52 Move the cursor over the first rebar in the footing array as shown. 49 On the Rebar Cover Settings dialog. Sketch Reinforcement in a Footing | 391 . 50 Repeat the same process to set the rebar cover on the opposite face of the structural wall. Click OK. Check rebar clear spacing 51 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. select Exposed/Cast against Earth. do the following: Under Description. click ■ ■ .48 On the Options Bar.

or close the exercise file without saving changes. 53 Click to select this plane.The vertical snapping plane of the bar is highlighted. 55 Click File menu ➤ Close. 54 Click to select this plane and place the dimension. and move the cursor to the edge of the footing as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall on page 393. Delete the dimension after verifying the clearance requirements have been met. 56 Proceed to the next exercise. The next exercise uses a new training file. 392 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE The dimension is placed to check the clear space distance from the concrete face to the rebar array. To save changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.

and zoom in on the southwest corner of the 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Toolbar. 4 Click inside the wall between grid lines B and C. click Modify.Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall In this exercise. draw a pick box. . NOTE The line weights in your file may differ from the examples shown. click structure. move the cursor down. click Training Files. Create section view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\i_RST_Wall_Detail. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 393 .rvt. Some of the rebar line weights were increased in the illustrations for training purposes. double-click Garage Level . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Structural Plans. and click the outside wall to place the section as shown. and position the drag bar as shown. 5 On the Design Bar.1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Section. you use the tools provided with Revit Structure to sketch reinforcement in a structural wall. 6 Click the section line.

9 In the section view. and select 3/4" = 1'. The Section 2 view opens.7 Press ESC. select the crop view. 10 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click Scale control. 8 Double-click the section bubble. 394 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . and drag the controls to resize the view such that only the foundation wall is shown. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.0". Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

12 In the Type Selector. 16 Press the SPACEBAR. 14 On the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Perpendicular. the graphics style is used to display detail in the section view. click Modify. select Rebar Bar : #7. as shown. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 395 . Place horizontal rebar 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Place the rebar at the base of the wall approximately as shown. do the following: ■ For Layout. Place rebar set 15 Select the single rebar. until a vertical line appears indicating the direction of placement. 17 On the Options Bar.NOTE For training purposes. select Maximum Spacing.

and drag the rebar shape handle down to Garage Level . The quantity of rebar adjusts to the extents of the structural wall on the garage level. Mirror the rebar set 21 Select the rebar set.1. and zoom in on the Ground Level of the structure. 22 On the Edit toolbar. click . enter 1' 6". click (Mirror).■ For Spacing. click Modify. draw a zoom box. 23 Move the cursor to the right until the center line reference plane of the wall appears as shown. 396 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . Resize the rebar set 18 On the Toolbar. 20 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the rebar set.

28 On the Options Bar. and click Zoom to Fit. Place vertical rebar 25 Right-click in an empty part of the drawing area. 26 On the Toolbar. click . and draw a zoom box around the lower half of the wall. 27 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. click Sketch. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 397 .24 Click to place the rebar. 29 Select the concrete wall as the rebar host.

1. 33 Press ESC. 32 Click to place the rebar. click . 37 Move the cursor over the wall until the center line reference plane appears. 34 On the Design Bar. Notice the cursor snaps to the rebar cover. Mirror the rebar 35 Click the vertical rebar. click Finish Sketch. 30 Click the base of the structural wall to establish the sketch start point. 398 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling . 31 Drag the sketch line up towards the top of the wall at Garage Level . 36 On the Edit toolbar.You are now in sketch mode.

Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 399 .38 Click to place the rebar. Set rebar visibility 39 Select the outside vertical rebar as shown.

40 Press CTRL. and select the outside horizontal rebar as shown. 400 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .

43 In the Rebar Element View Visibility States dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. for 3D View. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. select View unobscured and View as solid. double-click 3D. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. 46 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the garage ramp side of the structure is visible. click OK. Sketch Reinforcement in a Structural Wall | 401 .41 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. click Edit for View Visibility States. click .

or close the exercise file without saving changes. do the following: ■ ■ For Layout. To save changes. select Maximum Spacing. click File menu ➤ Save As. Extend the vertical rebar for the garage wall 48 Select the single rebar. 50 Proceed to the next tutorial. 402 | Chapter 10 Concrete Reinforcement Modelling .47 On the Toolbar. Notice the rebar is visible. For Spacing. and draw a zoom box around the garage ramp. Annotating and Dimensioning on page 403. 49 Click File menu ➤ Close. and on the Options Bar. The rebar automatically extends the entire length of the garage wall. enter 1' 6". click . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. linear. radial. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and ordinate. angular.rvt. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and double-click Floor. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions that you can add to your drawings. In Revit Structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 When the centerline of the wall highlights. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. select it. you learn how to annotate and dimension your Revit Structure 2009 projects. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Dimension. move the cursor over the north wall of the proposed North Building. baseline. multi-segmented. Dimensioning In this lesson. Create permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. The dimension types include aligned.Annotating and Dimensioning 11 In this tutorial. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components and select existing components. and open Imperial\i_RST_Dimensioning. By default. 403 . 3 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.

select it. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension.5 Move the cursor toward the south wall and when the centerline of the wall highlights. toward the empty space outside the wall. 404 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

10 On the Toolbar. and click to set the dimension location. and the distance between them does not change because the dimension is constrained. 13 On the Options Bar.The dimension displays in the drawing. Creating Dimensions | 405 . and press DELETE. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click Create a multi-segmented dimension 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the exterior faces of the top and bottom walls of the South Building. 14 Select the north and south walls of the North Building. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. click the lock to unlock it. (Undo). A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. 17 Move the cursor to the left of the South Building. The lock displays as locked. 7 Click the lock. 11 Select the dimension. select Wall faces for Prefer. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the south wall moves with the north wall. click Dimension. 15 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the north wall and move it upward. click Modify. indicating that the dimension can be modified.

indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. In addition. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall.An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and draw a zoom box around the curved wall. 406 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. click Dimension. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ (Create Radial Dimensions). and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Create a radial dimension 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Dimension a curved wall of the North Building: Select the southwest corner wall to display the radial dimension. and click to place the dimension.

click Modify. click ■ ■ . ■ Creating Dimensions | 407 . the default dimension option.The dimension is snapped to the wall centerline. and press DELETE. ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). click Dimension. as shown. and click to place the dimension. Create an angular dimension 27 On the Options Bar. and select Wall faces for Prefer. 25 Dimension the curved wall again: Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 23 On the Design Bar. and verify that Wall faces is selected 28 Dimension the angled wall at the top left of the North Building: Select the inside face of the angled wall below the opening. and place the dimension as shown. 22 On the Design Bar. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall below it. Select the inside face of the wall. 26 Adjust the zoom settings so that you can add a dimension to the upper-left portion of the North Building. 24 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor to the right to size the dimension arc. click for Prefer.

The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Move your cursor to the right. Click Apply. select a point at the interior corner of the top left wall join. You can override the cursor tracking by pressing the SPACEBAR. select Baseline. 38 Select the reference line for grid 1 to start the dimension string as shown. click Modify. Create a baseline dimension 32 On the Toolbar. click . click OK. click Edit/New. 33 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 408 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click . click Dimension. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. ■ ■ 31 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and click to place the dimension. and zoom in on the footings located just outside the exterior wall of the south building as shown. and OK.Create a linear dimension 29 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Create Horizontal or Vertical Dimensions). Select the interior corner of the bottom left wall join of the room. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. 30 Dimension interior walls in the South Building: ■ In the top room on the left side of the building. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. for Dimension String Type. 36 In the Type Properties dialog. .

46 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. Create an ordinate dimension 42 Select the baseline dimensions placed in the previous steps. 40 Select the reference lines for grids 4 and 5 to place the remaining dimensions as shown. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. for Dimension String Type. Creating Dimensions | 409 . . click Edit/New. 43 On the Options Bar. Notice the multiple dimensions display the distance from the same baseline (grid 1).39 Select the reference line for grids 2 and 3 as shown. Click Apply. 41 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ordinate. and OK. click .

and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. and enter S.I. do the following: ■ ■ For Below. Controlling Witness Line Location on page 411. 53 Proceed to the next exercise. under Text Fields. +/. Add supplemental text to a permanent dimension 47 Click the value for the ordinate dimension at grid 2. 50 In the Dimension Text dialog. 51 On the Design Bar. 52 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 48 In the Dimension Text dialog. click Replace with Text.rvt.A. enter V. to each additional element (grids 2 through 5). Notice the dimension value is replaced with the new text S.D. 410 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 49 Click the dimension text placed in the last step. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Under Dimension value.A.6" Click Apply and OK. Notice the new text appears below the supplemental text.M. Click Apply and OK.F. (See Architectural Drawing).Notice the perpendicular dimensions display the distance from the origin point or datum (grid 1).

rvt Override dimension defaults 1 Delete the multi-segmented vertical dimension that you placed along the left side of the building model in the previous exercise. 6 Position the cursor over the wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. you may want to locate the 2 outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. For example. in some cases. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. and select the exterior face. but do not select anything. whereas the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. and select the exterior face. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. 9 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall of the South Building. and select it. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Each time you press TAB.Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. because the Prefer wall faces option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. Controlling Witness Line Location | 411 . a different wall selection choice highlights. delete. 10 Move the cursor to the south wall of the South Building. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. select it. 7 When the exterior face of the wall highlights. 5 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer wall face. However. you learn to add. 3 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you place dimensions. including the wall centerline. and press TAB repeatedly. 4 Move the cursor over the north wall of the North Building. 11 Place the dimension as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 Move the cursor over the south wall of the North Building.

Edit dimension witness lines 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the dimension that you just placed. and control boxes display on each witness line. 412 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. The dimension highlights.

but do not select it. The witness line moves to interior wall face.14 Click twice on the control box on the witness line that references the south wall of the North Building. 16 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line that references the north wall of the South Building. Controlling Witness Line Location | 413 . and click Delete Witness Line. The witness line is deleted. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. 17 Right-click the control box. 15 Click the control box again.

a context menu with different options is displayed. click Edit/New. and click Edit Witness Lines. 414 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan.18 Right-click the dimension line that references the face of the south wall of the North Building. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. and select the multi-segmented dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 20 To end the editing command. The full dimension string is displayed. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.rvt. 19 Select the outside face of the north wall of the South Building. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. click . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Dimension Properties on page 414. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. If you right-click the control box. i_RST_Dimensioning-in progress.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 3/16" for the Text Size. For example. a lock symbol immediately displays. when sketching walls. You can save the open file if you wish. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. This controls which side (of the dimensioning arrow) the text is on. Under Text. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the aligned components are moved or modified. 5 Click OK twice. and open Imperial\i_RST_Alignment. 7 Click File menu ➤ Close.4 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. if 2 or more walls are colinear. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. click Modify. Working with Alignments and Constraints on page 415. not the direction it is read. In the next exercise. As you create components. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 415 . a new training file is provided. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. The dimension updates as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. then Up for Read Convention. select Right. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.

5 Select the lower center wall to define it as the target fixed wall to which the other walls will align. 3 Click the lock. Select the exterior face of the shorter horizontal wall on the left. indicating the 2 walls are not constrained to each other. indicating that the alignment of the 2 walls is now locked. click (Align). 416 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that the Align command is active. The shorter horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The symbol changes to a closed lock. 6 Select the short wall to the left. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. The cursor displays 2 arrows at its tip. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. select Multiple Alignment. the first component that you select is the target and remains fixed in position.Align the 2 uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Toolbar. Align the 3 short horizontal walls 4 On the Options Bar. When you align 2 components. 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall.

7 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. click (Undo) once to undo the move. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 417 . click Modify. and drag it downward. 12 Click the right wall. 10 Select the middle horizontal wall. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the 2 walls is not constrained (locked). 8 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 11 On the Toolbar. 9 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.

14 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.Move the walls to verify the alignment. 418 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. clear Multiple Alignment. click (Align). Align the windows on the floor plan 13 On the Toolbar.

20 Click the lock to unlock it.The 2 windows align. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 19 To view the constraint. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. on the Design Bar. 18 Select the far right window in the top wall. as shown. click Modify. A lock is displayed. Working with Alignments and Constraints | 419 . and align the windows. indicating the constraint. 22 Align the remaining windows. 21 On the Toolbar. click . 17 Select the far right window in the bottom wall.

Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt. i_RST_Alignment-in progress.rvt. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions on page 420. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. 1 View the south wall. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each opening displays in the dimension string. and notice that it includes 5 openings. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Alignment-in progress. 420 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .23 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

click (Create Aligned Dimensions). Working with Spot Dimensions on page 421. You can save the open file if you wish. 9 Click File menu ➤ Close. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. 5 Click OK. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. the windows). Click Options. a new training file is provided. The 2 vertical walls highlight. Working with Spot Dimensions | 421 . click Dimension. 6 Select the south wall. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. select Openings and Widths. verify that Wall centerlines is selected. and click to add the dimension. For Prefer. 7 Move your cursor below the south wall. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. you learn how to use the spot dimension feature of Revit Structure. select Entire Walls.2 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. For Pick. Working with Spot Dimensions In this exercise. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the left. Click to create the second leader point. and for Relative Base. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click New Roof. Add spot dimensions to the tapered roof 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. click . select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). expand Structural Plans. Move the cursor to the left. select Leader. and draw a zoom box around the upper view as shown. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. 422 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . 2 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\i_RST_Spot_Dimensions_Tapered_Roof. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click to place the spot dimension. select Current Level. Notice that the value of the spot elevation is displayed as the cursor is moved. Click the center of the tapered insulation to create the first leader point as shown.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the tapered roof.

Working with Spot Dimensions | 423 . click 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Drag the leader to the right to place the dimension. 9 In the Type Selector.■ On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. Click to create the second leader point. Move the cursor to the right. Click to place the spot dimension. 11 Place the spot dimension as follows: ■ Click the corner of the slab (grid location A1) to create the first leader point as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right. select Leader. and draw a zoom box around the structural columns as shown. and for Relative Base. select Current Level. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). click Modify.

and double-click Foundation. select Spot Elevations: No Symbol (Relative). 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a spot dimension to the footing 12 In the Project Browser. click . expand Structural Plans. Click to create the second leader point. Move the cursor up and to the right. and draw a zoom box around a footing as shown. select Leader. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 424 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. and Current Level for Relative Base. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Place the spot elevation as follows: ■ ■ ■ Click the upper-right corner of the footing. click Modify.■ On the Design Bar.

■ ■ Move the cursor to the right. click Modify. click ■ . enter TOF=. ■ On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. Click to create the third leader point. ■ Click OK. for Single/Upper Value Prefix. click Modify. Change the spot dimension properties 18 Select the spot dimension. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the elevation at the top of the footing is displayed. Working with Spot Dimensions | 425 . do the following: Under Text.

click . ■ 426 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. 29 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Coordinate. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. select In-line with Leader. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Detail Level. Add spot coordinates to a sloped beam 28 In the Project Browser. click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. For Text Location. and then OK. select Medium. and double-click South Elevation. 27 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.Change the text orientation 22 Select the spot dimension. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the center of the sloped beam to create the first leader point as shown. Notice that the value of the spot coordinate displays as the cursor moves. 31 Place the spot coordinate as follows: ■ Move the cursor along the edge of the sloped beam.

35 In the Type Properties dialog. Click to place the spot coordinate. Click to create the second leader point. click Modify. Move the cursor to the right. click . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. For Elevation Indicator. 37 On the Design Bar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Working with Spot Dimensions | 427 . select In-line with Leader. enter EL. On the Design Bar. Change the spot coordinate orientation 32 Select the spot coordinate. 33 On the Options Bar. click OK. Click Apply. Notice that the elevation indicator displays below the existing coordinates. and then OK. For Text Location. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Bold. click Modify. click Edit/New. under Text.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor up and to the right.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Beam Annotations. expand Structural Plans. 428 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Tag beams in a plan view Tag a beam system Tag beams by category Create a custom type mark in place of the beam tag Create a custom beam tag. Tagging Beams In this exercise. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to use the beam annotation tool to tag all beams in a plan view.38 Click File menu ➤ Close. In the next lesson. You also learn how to create a custom mark in place of an existing beam tag. and open Imperial\i_RST_Annotations. a new training file is provided. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Structure. and double-click Level 2. and add an end reaction annotation to specific beams in the structure. You can save the open file if you wish. Tag all beams in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Annotating In this lesson.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Annotating on page 428.

Add an end-reaction value to specific beams 4 Select multiple beams located inside one of the bays as shown. for Horizontal End Offset. Notice that a beam tag has been added to the top-middle location on all beams within the plan view. do the following: ■ ■ Under Placement. and click Remove existing beam tags and spot elevations. 6 In the Beam Annotations dialog. Click OK. do the following: ■ Under Placement. the tags that were placed in the previous steps have been removed from this view. In the Placement Settings dialog. ■ ■ Tagging Beams | 429 . select All beams in current plan view. enter 1". 3 In the Beam Annotations dialog.The Beam Annotations dialog opens. select All selected beams in current plan view. and click OK. Click Settings. 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE For training purposes. click Beam Annotations.

click Structural Framing Tag. to specify the top-end annotation type as shown. ■ Under Annotation location and type. Click . ■ ■ In the Select Annotation Type dialog.Live. select Structural Framing Tag-w-End Reactions : Standard. under Analysis Results. under Select Element to Place. ■ ■ In the Beam Annotations dialog. Under Structural Framing Tag. click . and click OK. and click OK. Enter the reaction force 7 On the Options Bar.This dimension sets the annotation offset distance measured from the beam start location as indicated in the dialog. enter 10. 430 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. The end reaction value is added to the selected beams.0 kip for End Reaction . click the Level beams in plan tab.

click Edit/New. click Apply. enter W18. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. . click OK. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Type Mark. 12 Draw a zoom box that surrounds the upper beams between grids C and D as shown. and then OK. 11 Right-click the open area above the model. click 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the W18X40 beams. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Click one of the W14X22 beams. enter W14. click Edit/New. . click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and then OK. click Apply. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Tagging Beams | 431 . under Type Mark.9 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. Create a custom type mark tag 10 Enter ZF (Zoom to Fit).

click the W18X40 beam tag. 28 On the Family Design Bar. click OK. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. click OK.by Type Mark for File name. under Label. click Edit Family. The new beam tag is applied to the selected beams. 22 Click the structural label. Click Save. and on the Options Bar. 24 In the Edit Label dialog. for Value. select the active file. click Yes. 29 In the Load into Projects dialog. under Category Parameters. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 In the Type Selector. and on the Options bar. click . 27 In the Save As dialog.by Type Mark: Standard. Enter Structural Framing Tag . You are now in the Family Editor. click Load into Projects. click Edit. (Add 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Structural Framing Tag . 432 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Type Mark. Edit the beam tag family 21 Click one of the W18X40 beam tags. while pressing CTRL. select the W14X22 beam tag. and. click parameter(s) to a label).20 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select a folder location. Apply the new type mark tag to all beams 30 In the plan view. and click OK.

Tagging Beams | 433 . 34 In the Filter dialog. click ■ ■ (Filter).32 Enter ZF. and draw a pick box around the entire model as shown. Select Structural Framing Tags. 33 On the Options bar. do the following: Click Check None to clear all items.

35 In the Type Selector. 36 To save your changes. The new beam tag is applied to all beams. and draw a zoom box around the beam system as shown. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As.■ Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Structural Framing Tag .by Type Mark: Standard. Tag the beam system 37 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 434 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .

click Beam System Tag. you learn how to create a custom beam tag that includes multiple categories and then apply the tag to different beam types. click Training Files. Open the beam tag family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit Family. 39 Click any beam within the beam system to place the tag. In the next exercise a new training file is provided.rvt. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_beam_tag. and notice the tag for the specific beam system displays. the existing beam tags have been removed for the following steps. expand Structural Plans. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor over the beams in the drawing area. When prompted to open the Structural Framing Tag for editing. 3 Click the structural label. click Edit Label. Creating a Custom Beam Tag In this exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. You are now in the Family Editor. Creating a Custom Beam Tag on page 435. 40 Click File ➤ Close. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 435 . click Yes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE For training purposes. and double-click Level 2. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 2 Click one of the W14X22 beam tags.

add the following Label Parameters: ■ ■ Select parameter 1. Under Visibility. (Add parameter). select Number of studs. enter [ (open bracket). under Graphics. . and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 3. 8 On the Options Bar. select Reference Planes. and click The new category is added to the label as parameter 2. enter ) (right parenthesis). for Prefix. add the following categories: ■ Under Category Parameters. enter ] (close bracket). and click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. for Spaces. enter ( (left parenthesis). select Camber Size. Select parameter 2. 10 Press VV (Visibility/Graphic Overrides). do the following: ■ ■ Click the Annotation Categories tab. click . select Top. select 3. Align the beam tag 7 Click the drag control for the label until the text is positioned on two lines as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 436 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning . click OK. ■ 5 In the Edit Label dialog. for Sample Value. for Sample Value.Add multiple categories to the beam label 4 In the Edit Label dialog. enter W14X22. for Prefix. ■ 6 In the Edit Label dialog. for Sample Value. and for Suffix. and select Break. enter S1. enter C=1/2". Select parameter 3. and for Suffix. Under Category Parameters. for Vertical Align.

Notice the Structural Framing Schedule includes the number of studs parameter. expand Schedules/Quantities. expand Structural Plans. Creating a Custom Beam Tag | 437 . and click Yes. View the framing schedule 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. Notice that each beam tag now specifies a different camber setting based on the beam type. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click Modify. and double-click Structural Framing Schedule.■ Click OK. 13 Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to move the text until the beam type is positioned just below the horizontal reference plane as shown. and the camber size for each beam type in the structure. View the properties for beam type S2 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the text on the beam label. In the Reload Family dialog. click Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Project.

■ 21 Click File ➤ Save As. and save the completed project in a folder location of your preference. notice that the Camber Size value reflects the parameters entered in the framing schedule. Click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. Worksets on page 439. do the following: Under Structural. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. 19 On the Options Bar. click ■ . 438 | Chapter 11 Annotating and Dimensioning .18 Click one of the W18x40 beams.

you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and how to borrow particular elements from other users. You can enable Worksharing for any project. and open Imperial\i_RST_Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. however. Using Worksharing. to allow visibility control and ownership for each assigned element. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. engineers commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional task. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. and they can publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. this collection of building elements (such as roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. All other team members can view this workset. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. They can also update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the central file. You begin by enabling Worksharing within a project and setting up the initial workset environment.rvt. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project.Worksets 12 On many building projects. beams. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network to their own hard drive. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. 439 . In the next exercise. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project. In this tutorial. and to have all the elements coordinated by Revit Structure. Enable Worksharing 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.) is called a workset. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. slabs. In Revit Structure 2009. etc. they cannot make changes to it. click Training Files.

select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and User1 is displayed as the present owner. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 440 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. 7 In the New Workset dialog. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. Therefore. a third is assigned all beams and columns. and all team members must have access to all linked or imported DWG or RVT files. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog is displayed. imagine 5 users including yourself. a second user is assigned the roof. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. enter Beams and Columns. TIP The initial owner name is assigned by the operating system of your computer. a fifth is assigned to the elevator shafts. For training purposes. under Show. For training purposes. The project is subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. clear Families. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. the user name was changed in the Options dialog (accessible from the Settings menu). You cannot change your user name with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. Project Standards. a fourth is assigned the foundation and garage ramp. 5 Under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. In this case. a small number of team members are working on the structural model.2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. In this simple training project. and notice all are editable by you. and Views. one team member is assigned to the slabs. 3 In the Worksets dialog.

Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. enter Slabs. 8 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 441 . Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name.■ Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. This improves performance because fewer components need to be generated in each view. 13 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Elevator Shafts. 11 In the New Workset dialog. Click OK. Click OK. click New. The foundation should only be visible in specific views. click New. ■ 12 In the Worksets dialog. 10 In the Worksets dialog. click New. enter Foundation. 9 In the New Workset dialog.

this improves performance. Clear Visible by default in all views. Click OK. The garage ramp should only be visible in specific views.14 In the Worksets dialog. Again. 19 In the New Workset dialog. enter Linked or imported DWG or RVT files. click New. 15 In the New Workset dialog. this improves performance. Clear Visible by default in all views. The roof should only be visible in specific views. ■ 16 In the Worksets dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Roof. ■ 18 In the Worksets dialog. 17 In the New Workset dialog. do the following: ■ ■ For new workset name. enter Garage Ramp. Click OK. Again. click New. 442 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click New. Verify that Visible by default in all views is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For new workset name. Click OK.

you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. enter Worksets Project . 22 In the Save As dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ ■ User-Created Families Project Standards Views 26 Select all the worksets by pressing CTRL+A. 23 Click Save.You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Now that you have created the central file. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Non Editable. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. The next step is to create the central file. NOTE Continue using the central file for the following steps. 25 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 443 . If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 27 On the right side of the dialog. 20 In the Worksets dialog. under Show. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.Central. for file name. click OK Create the central file 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Check in the worksets 24 Click File menu ➤ Worksets.

and click OK. navigate to a folder on your local computer. 33 Select the file. 444 | Chapter 12 Worksets . notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and also notice that all worksets are not available for editing. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. click OK. and click Open. Navigate to the location of the central file Worksets Project . 28 In the Worksets dialog. 36 Enter Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for File name. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a local file 32 Click File menu ➤ Open. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 30 In the Save to Central dialog.Central on the network drive. 35 In the Save As dialog. enter Initial Central File Setup. click File menu ➤ Close. 31 After the file is saved. under Comments.In the Worksets dialog. and click Save. Assigning Worksets on page 445.

notice that all worksets are available for editing. and created a local file. click . for Workset. In the Worksets dialog. and created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Assigning Worksets In this exercise. You then created the central file. 7 Click the highlighted column to deselect it. you enabled Worksharing on a project. 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. NOTE Continue using the local file Worksets Project_Local-User 1 for the following exercise. 8 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 4 On the Options Bar. checked in all worksets. you assign the structural columns workset to User1. 3 Click one of the structural columns as shown. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 6 Click OK. select Beams and Columns. Assigning Worksets | 445 . 2 Click Cancel.In this exercise.

13 Select Structural Columns. notice that User1 is listed.The Worksets dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 446 | Chapter 12 Worksets . Assign the structural columns 10 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. and click OK. under Borrowers for Workset1. click Check None. click . 12 In the Filter dialog. 9 Click Cancel.

15 On the Options Bar. click . and a workset puzzle-piece icon displays next to each column indicating it can be changed to editable. The puzzle-piece icons disappear. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. for Workset.All structural columns in the model are highlighted. Assigning Worksets | 447 . and click Make Elements Editable. 14 Right-click one of the columns. select Beams and Columns. but the columns remain highlighted.

1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Click Open. you make the entire workset editable and assign individual elements to specific users.17 Click OK. clear Borrowed Elements. 19 In the Save to Central dialog. Navigate to the location of the central file Worsksets Project-Central on the network drive. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. to save the local file. and click OK. 3 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. Making the Entire Workset Editable on page 448. Making the Entire Workset Editable In this exercise. 448 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under After save relinguish editable. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The columns and beams elements are now assigned for Workset1.

click .In the Worksets dialog. User1 is now listed as the Owner of Workset1. 7 On the Options Bar. and select Floors. click Check None. Assign the floor workset 6 Draw a pick box around the entire model to select all elements. 5 Click OK. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 449 . notice User1 is listed under Borrowers for Beams and Columns. 4 In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click the Editable on the right-side of the dialog.

9 Click OK. All floors are highlighted. for Workset. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. select Slabs. 450 | Chapter 12 Worksets . click . 12 Click OK. The slabs are now assigned for Workset1.

foundation. The roof is now assigned for Workset1. 18 Enter VV. 19 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Making the Entire Workset Editable | 451 . click . 16 Click OK. 14 On the Options Bar.Assign the roof workset 13 Select the roof as shown. assign the remaining worksets for the elevator shafts. This is the keyboard shortcut for Visibility/Graphic override. select Roof. Using the steps described in the previous procedure. Turn visibility on/off 17 Click elsewhere in the drawing area to deselect the roof. for Workset. click the Worksets tab. and the garage ramp.

452 | Chapter 12 Worksets . To turn off additional elements. Roof. clear the box next to the desired element. click the Worksets tab. The elements are now visible in the view. and then click Apply and OK. and Slabs. Roof. and then click Apply and OK. and on the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.20 Clear Beams and Columns. Save to central file 24 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and Slabs. 23 Check Beams and Columns. 22 Enter VV. 21 The elements are now hidden from the view.

click Options. 3 On the Settings menu. please do so before continuing.rvt. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. one user has already created a local file. This is a system setting. For training purposes. make elements editable. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. instructions are staggered.25 In the Save to Central dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. Each modifies the structural model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. under User name. and click OK. enter Reassigning elements to their own worksets. In the following section of this exercise. User 2: Create a local file. consider that person to be User 1. Using Worksets with Multiple Users on page 453. 4 Click the General Tab and. 2 Start a new Revit Structure session by double-clicking the Revit Structure icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and proceed to Create a local copy. Create a local copy 5 In this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. select: ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements 26 After the file is saved. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. two users work on the structural model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Throughout the process. two users access the central file through a network connection. each user must check out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 453 . return to the Settings dialog. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets project-Central. and check out worksets 6 Click File menu ➤ Open. 27 Under Comment. enter User 2. Use a second Revit Structure session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Structure window. skip the following section. click File menu ➤ Save to save a local copy. For training purposes. and reset the User name to your computer login name. and reload the latest changes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. specifically sequenced. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 28 Click OK.

and move it. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Foundation to Yes. expand 3D Views. open it now. 16 Click OK. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that the Foundation workset is checked out by User 2. and click OK. under Open Worksets. If it is not open. This file is for your use only. and click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Beams and Columns. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. 24 Select any column on the foundation level as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Project Browser. 454 | Chapter 12 Worksets . 15 Select the Foundation workset. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. User 1: Check out worksets. modify the structural model. click Options. select all the User-Created worksets. and select Yes for Editable. 8 Click Open. You are now the owner of that workset. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 In the Save As dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. 21 Select the Beams and Columns workset. 12 In the File Save Options dialog. 22 Click OK. select Specify. In addition. You now have a local copy of the project. and double-click 3D-Atrium. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.7 In the Open dialog. 14 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. it becomes the active workset. select the central file and.

User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. and double-click 3D-Atrium. expand 3D Views.A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 455 . select a footing. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and move it. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 28 Click OK.

double-click Roof. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. This is because when the Roof workset was created. click Pick Supports. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. 40 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Modify. select Yes for Editable. 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a new roof between any four beams. 34 Select Roof. 33 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and click OK. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 41 Notice that the roof you added previously now displays. 35 On the Project Browser. select Roof to turn on its visibility. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Visibility/Graphics. Therefore. Even though the Roof workset is active. 38 On the Design Bar. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Beams and Columns worksets. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. the Visible by default option was not selected. any elements added to the structure are automatically assigned to the active workset. and check out additional worksets 32 Click File menu ➤ Reload Latest.31 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. click Slab. 39 On the View menu. Click Yes. 37 In the Design Bar. under Structural Plans. However. you are asked if you want to make the Roof workset the active workset. 456 | Chapter 12 Worksets . You should turn on the visibility before adding a roof.

and click Open. There are specific instructions for each user. In the final exercise of this tutorial. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select them. two users worked on the same structure using worksets. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. and these problems are rectified. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. you save the training file as a central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 457 . 44 Click OK. In this exercise. if any User-Created worksets are not open. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. This exercise requires two users and. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. 43 In the Save to Central dialog. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Structure and setting the user name to User 2. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). leave this file open in its current state. In subsequent steps. At the appropriate point in this exercise.42 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. Each user checked out worksets. throughout this training. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. User 1: Check out worksets 1 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. As each of you work. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. modified the structure and published their changes back to the central file. 2 In the Worksets dialog. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Each user must have network access to the central file. Check out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 457.

11 Move the footing. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1.3 Select the Foundation workset. 10 Using the following illustration as a guide. 6 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. expand 3D Views. User 2: Check out worksets 5 Click File menu ➤ Worksets. and select Yes for Editable. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click OK. At this point. and double-click 3D-Atrium. After you submit the request. You are now the owner of that workset. 12 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to move the footing. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. 458 | Chapter 12 Worksets . User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 13 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 7 Under Active Workset. select Foundation. and click OK. select the Beams and Columns workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 8 In the Project Browser. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click File menu ➤ Editing Requests. select Beams and Columns. 4 Under Active Workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. select a footing. 9 On the Options Bar.

select the request submitted by User 2. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. to Local. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and close 19 Click File menu ➤ Save to Central. and click OK. 22 Proceed to the next tutorial. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this multi-user exercise. Project Coordination on page 461. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 20 In the Save to Central dialog. In this case. click Check Now. 16 Click Close. select the following. and the other user granted it. you requested permission to edit the element. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 459 . 15 Click Grant. and notice the footing is in the new location.14 In the Editing Requests dialog. User 2: Check for editability grant 17 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 18 Click OK.

460 .

and columns for any future modifications. and the copy monitor feature was activated. and determines the impact of each modification on the structure. Click OK to open the file. depending on the impact to the design. the copy monitor feature automatically notifies you of the changes. or postponed. Starting a New Project on page 149. reviews each change individually. a warning is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. an interference check is run on the model to correct the placement of any architectural elements (door. or window) that might interfere with elements in the Revit Structure 2009 model. you begin by opening the Revit Structure file that contains the modified Revit Architecture file. In this tutorial. Coordination Review In this lesson. walls. the architect’s file was imported into Revit Structure. rejected. all changes are documented using the Revit Structure revision system feature. levels. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Imperial\i_RST_Coordination. This feature enabled the engineer to monitor the project grids. This task is accomplished using the copy monitor feature that was activated when the project was started.rvt NOTE Because some of the changes from the architect involve elements that are monitored by the copy monitor feature of Revit Structure. the structural engineer imports the modified Revit Architecture model. Once each change has been reviewed.Project Coordination 13 You have received the latest model from the architect and changes have been made to the design. In the tutorial. 461 . you run an interference check to verify that the changes do not interfere with structural elements of the model. floors. click Training Files. Finally. Finally. When the modified file is brought back into Revit Structure. which can be accepted.

7 Enter ZF. click Apply. under Structural Plans. under Graphics.1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Click .rvt. 462 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 5 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Selecting this discipline allows the architectural walls to be visible. 3 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics. The modified Revit Architecture file will now be visible along with the Revit Structure file. 4 Select the linked file i_RBD_After. select Coordination for Discipline. select the Revit Links tab. and draw a zoom box around the upper-left corner of the building at grid line B. This is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 8 On the View Toolbar. double-click Level 3. and notice the duplicate grid lines and the relocation of the stairway. and click OK.

Close all additional views that may have been opened accidentally. Click to select the linked file. and click Wireframe.9 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the elevator shaft is visible as shown. . click as shown. and the Coordination Review icon displays on the Options Bar. Click between grid lines A and B until the Revit Links box is displayed. and draw a zoom box around the lower levels of the elevator shaft 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 10 On the Toolbar. The Level 3 Plan view and the 3D view are displayed in separate windows. click the Model Graphics Style control. The Revit Architecture file is highlighted. On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Structural Plan: Level 3 window: ■ ■ ■ Select . click Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 463 . 13 On the Options Bar. . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft.

or changed in some way from the architect’s file. and a custom message that pertains to each New/Unresolved category. and click Show. Notice each floor is highlighted on the 3D view. and then click Show. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Floors ➤ expand Monitor Floor Sketches. and click Apply. Reject. In the Action column. Display the review message for any individual floor by expanding Sketches are Different. Review change to Floor Sketch 15 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the 3D window is visible. 16 In the Coordination Review dialog. ■ Click the first message under Monitor Floor Sketches.The Coordination Review lists all messages that require some type of action. The structural engineer should address each message individually and take some form of action to resolve the conflict. select the remaining messages. 14 Click the 3D Views: 3D window to deselect the plan view. select Copy Sketch to Floor: 6" Concrete. moved. ■ 464 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . Click the message Floor: Floor: 6" Concrete. The selected floor from the structural model is highlighted in the 3D window. Actions include: Postpone. These messages identify elements that were deleted. Accept Difference. press SHIFT.

and click Apply.rvt: Grids: Grid:B. and click Show. Click the message i_RBD_After. and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft in the plan view. Review location of elevator walls 19 On the Toolbar. Review location of grid B 17 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the plan view is visible. click . The grid line is adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. 18 In the Coordination Review dialog.The concrete floor sketches for all levels of the structure will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s floor sketch change. Grid B from the architect’s model is highlighted on the Level 3 window. select Modify Grid B. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 465 . do the following: ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Grids ➤ Maintain relative position of Grids ➤ Grid moved. ■ For Action.

Select one of the messages and notice the wall is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 plan view. There are 4 changes involving the elevator shaft walls. select Modify Wall Basic Wall: Generic 8" Masonry. For Action. ■ ■ 466 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . press SHIFT. Click the first message under Wall centerlines are different. expand Maintain wall position. and click Apply. and select the remaining messages.20 In the Coordination Review dialog. do the following: ■ Under New/Unresolved ➤ Walls.

In the Edit Comment dialog. 22 In the Coordination Review dialog. Click the Add Comment field. ■ ■ In the Edit Comment dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Expand New/Unresolved ➤ Walls ➤ Monitor Wall Sketches ➤ Sketch is missing. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Generic . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Coordination-in progress.8" Masonry.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK. and OK. The structural engineer will discuss this change with the architect before proceeding. enter Need to discuss with architect. Opening the Modified Revit Architecture file | 467 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Click the Add Comment field. In the Coordination Review dialog. click Apply.The elevator walls on the structural model will be adjusted to accommodate the architect’s change. Review wall modifications 21 Position the Coordination Review dialog so the lower floors of the 3D View are visible. enter Need to discuss with architect. Click OK. Click the message Walls: Basic Wall: Foundation . Select Postpone for Action.12" Concrete. Select Postpone for Action.

i_RST_Coordination-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Interference Check on page 468. you use the interference tool in Revit Structure to check on 2 potential problems with the stairway. The first is the possible interference between the stairs and a relocated structural column. and the second is a structural brace that interferes with a door opening in the stairway. select i_RBD_After.24 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Interference Check In this exercise. 468 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . The next step is to select the architect’s file so it can be checked against the structural project. The default table compares elements within the same project.rvt for Categories from. 2 On the right-side of the Interference Check dialog.rvt 1 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check.

select Structural Columns. and Stairs for the Revit Architecture project.Notice the categories for the architect’s file differ from the current Revit Structure project. Interference Check | 469 . Run interference check on columns and stairs 3 In the list for the current project.

4 Click OK. 470 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . do the following: ■ Under Structural Columns. 5 In the Interference Report dialog. A report is generated showing all instances of interference between columns in the structural project and the upper-left stairway in the Revit Architecture project. expand the message for Level 3 Stairs as shown.

select Revit Interference Report (*. select a folder location on your local computer. Notice the stairway of the architect’s model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window Select Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange Column: W10X33. Under Save as type. Click Export to generate an interference report.html). and that it interferes with the stairway. Under File name. Interference Check | 471 . Click Save. enter Columns vs. Each representing a different level.rvt: Stairs: Stair: 7" max riser 11" tread.There are 7 instances of interference between structural columns and the upper-left stairway. Notice the column of the structural model is highlighted on the Structural Plan: Level 3 window. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. ■ ■ Export the Column interference report 6 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. ■ Select i_RBD_After. Stair Check.

and Doors for the Revit Architecture project. 472 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 9 In the Interference Check dialog. Run interference check on vertical bracing 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Interference Check ➤ Run Check. 10 Select Structural Framing ➤ Vertical Bracing for Current Project. 11 Click OK. select i_RBD_After. There is 1 instance of interference between structural bracing and the door for the upper-left stairway.rvt for Categories from. click Close.7 In the Interference Report dialog.

Select Structural Framing: L-Angle: L4X4X3/4 ■ . select a folder location on your local computer. Under File name. Door opening. also the brace interferes with the opening.html). Notice the door from the architect’s model is highlighted on both the 3D View and Structural Plan view windows. ■ Click Export to generate an interference report. enter Brace vs. Export the Brace and Door interference report 13 In the Export dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. Select i_RBD_After.12 In the Interference Report dialog.rvt: Doors: Door Single. Interference Check | 473 . select Revit Interference Report (*. do the following: ■ ■ Under Structural Framing ➤ expand Doors. Under Save as type. Notice the brace from the structural model is highlighted on both the 3D view and Structural Plan view windows.

yet as concise as possible. click Revisions. 15 In the Interference Report dialog. The report provides detail on the interference and should be used to discuss the problem with the architect. Using Revision Tracking on page 474. For example. click Training Files. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 2 In the Revisions dialog. Add a revision for grid B 3 Click on the value for Release Date. You can create a sequence of revisions. Using Revision Tracking Revit Structure provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In the next lesson. the revision is locked and issued to the field. In general. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the title block of each project sheet. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog.rvt. and enter Moved Grid B west by 2'. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save and save the file in a folder of your preference. When you use this option. If you select By Project. Setting Up a Revision Table Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. and open Imperial\i_RST_Revision. and enter 2/15/06. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. 474 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . a new training file is provided. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 4 Click on the value for Description. if the active revision is number 1. click Close. This is the date the revisions were identified.■ Click Save. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. verify that By Sheet is selected for Numbering Method. When Issued is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 Click Apply. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. including revision number and revision date. Sketching Revision Clouds on page 475. 3 Right-click the view on the sheet. Each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. In most instances. and OK. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Add a revision cloud for grid B 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. However. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 5 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. you can add a revision cloud to the 3D view once it is placed on a sheet. double-click S. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet.If Visible is not selected. you indicate the changes made by the architect graphically with a revision cloud. Revision clouds have read-only properties.1 . 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click near grid line B. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D model views. under Sheets (all). Sketching Revision Clouds | 475 . and select Activate View. click Revision Cloud. 4 In the drawing area. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.Level 3 Framing Plan. 6 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.

the revision for grid line B should be issued to the field to prevent any changes to the revision cloud. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. When Issued is selected. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following file name: i_RST_Revision-in progress. and enter 2/20/06.rvt. yet as concise as possible. the revisions to the project will be issued after all the revision clouds have been drawn. 3 Click on the value for Release Date. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 In the Revisions dialog. Add Remaining Revisions In this exercise. Add Remaining Revisions on page 476. click Revisions. 6 Verify that Visible is selected.rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and enter Moved Stair exit 2' west. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified grid line. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a revision for the elevator stairs 1 On the Settings menu. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save As.7 On the Design Bar. NOTE At this point. In general. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. 476 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. i_RST_Revision-in progress. click Add: New. the remaining revisions for the project are documented. click Finish Sketch. In this tutorial. 4 Click on the value for Description.

Add a revision cloud for the elevator stairs 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified stairs. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 14 Click on the value for Description. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. and enter 2/21/06. 8 In the drawing area. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 13 Click on the value for Release Date. click Add: New. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Add Remaining Revisions | 477 . click above the elevator shaft.If Visible is not selected. In most instances. Add a revision for the brace interference 12 In the Revisions dialog. and enter Research brace. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table.

yet as concise as possible. 20 In the drawing area. click above the brace. 18 Right-click the center view on the sheet. In most instances. 22 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 21 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 478 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . 16 Verify that Visible is selected. 19 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a revision cloud for the brace interference 17 In the Project Browser. double-click S. When Issued is selected.In general. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. If Visible is not selected. under Sheets (all). and select Activate View. the revision is locked and issued to the field.2 . The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet.Stair Shafts Sections. click Revision Cloud. 15 Verify that Issued is cleared.

and enter Research door. Add a revision for the door interference 24 In the Revisions dialog. A new row is added below the existing row in the revision table. The revision cloud is displayed around the brace. the revision is locked and issued to the field. This is the date the revisions were sent out for review. click Finish Sketch. click Add: New. and enter 2/22/06. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible.23 On the Design Bar. 25 Click on the value for Release Date. Add Remaining Revisions | 479 . When Issued is selected. In general. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. 27 Verify that Issued is cleared. 26 Click on the value for Description. 28 Verify that Visible is selected.

you apply a revision tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.2 . Revit Structure is now in sketch mode. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. click Finish Sketch.rvt. 30 Right-click the right view on the sheet. 36 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets (all).Stair Shafts Sections. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and select Activate View. 35 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the door. i_RST_Revision-in progress. Add a revision cloud for the door interference 29 In the Project Browser. double-click S. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click above the door. 32 In the drawing area. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 480 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.If Visible is not selected. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 31 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 34 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. In most instances. Tagging Revision Clouds on page 480. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and lock it from further changes. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud for grid line B. Because you chose to number by sheet. and select Activate View. and because the revision is the first in the project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. the cloud is tagged as number 1. Working with Revisions on page 481. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. allowing you to edit the model directly from the sheet. and then issue the revisions to create a record. 7 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add revision tags for all remaining revision clouds. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you first view the revisions that were created in the previous exercise. 2 Right-click the view on the sheet. double-click S.Place a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ Tag By Category. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 6 Click to place the tag. under Sheets (all). i_RST_Revision-in progress.Level 3 Framing Plan. The Activate View command activates a viewport on the sheet. Working with Revisions | 481 . 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.1 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader.

Issue a revision 5 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. you can no longer modify it. You do this by issuing the revision.Stair Shafts Sections.View the revisions 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 6 Select Issued for each revision entry. and click OK. 4 Select . 2 Select .1 . click Revisions. and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. under Sheets (all). and draw a zoom box around the title block as shown. 3 In the Project Browser.2 . double-click S. double-click S. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. you prevent further changes to the revision. 482 | Chapter 13 Project Coordination . On the Settings menu.Level 3 Framing Plan. NOTE After you issue a revision.

7 Click File menu ➤ Close. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Working with Revisions | 483 . 8 Proceed to the next tutorial. Structural Analytical Modelling on page 485.

484 .

485 . you can reapply the modified template. Applying the Analytical Model to the Design Process Revit Structure combines 2 models. component properties. NOTE Reapplying a view template overrides previous view property modifications and View templates can only be applied to geometric views. Discipline. Though the View Range property applies only to plan views. You can apply a template to an existing or new view. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Because each view in Revit Structure consists of different properties. To update a view. material properties. the analytical model is created automatically based on engineering rules and logical relationships between the structural objects. if you save a template from a plan view. For example. You can save the View Template from one type of view and apply those same properties to any other geometric view. Revit Structure applies only the properties applicable to both. the View Template saves and applies only common properties. When working with the analytical model. All views created with that template are not automatically updated. Views and View Templates are not linked. geometry. you learn some basic concepts of the Revit Structure 2009 analytical model and how to prepare the model to be analyzed by a third party analysis software. interaction with steel detailers and fabricators and also the analytical model that can be consumed by multiple 3rd party analysis software. The physical model that is used for documentation. You can also apply an existing view’s view properties using the Apply View Template command. the template is still applied to the 3D view. The analytical model consists of structural components. View Templates help standardize the look of all views. As you create objects and the physical model. Detail level. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. loads and load combinations. Revit Structure View Templates provide initial conditions for a view.Structural Analytical Modelling 14 In this tutorial. quantity take off. you can apply that same template to a 3D view.

and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Analytical_Checks. select Structural Analytical Normal or Structural Analytical Stick. 486 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . you learn how to check member supports. and run an analytical consistency check on the analytical model shown below. Apply the view template 1 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Select View Template dialog. The Structural Analytical Stick view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan with only the analytical model displayed as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Structural Analytical Normal view template will present structural components in this new analytical plan view with both the analytical model and the physical model displayed as shown. Analytical checks should be run at different phases of the project and the model adjusted accordingly.rvt.Analytical Checks In this exercise.

or isolated). Analytical Checks | 487 . select the Analytical Model Settings tab. wall. Check member supports 3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Check Member Supports. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. Review support warnings 6 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. Verify analytical settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. This tutorial will run both the Member Supports Check and Analytical/Physical Model Consistency Check for all elements selected from the Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings dialog. 4 In the Warning dialog click . 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.NOTE If the visibility of loads is tuned off in the view. Revit Structure checks for instances where a structural element (column) is missing a foundation support (slab. 5 Close the Warning dialog. under the Analytical Model Settings tab. A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are structural elements that may not be supported properly. applying either the stick or normal analytical view template to the view will cause loads to be displayed. to view each warning.

Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X33 ■ ■ Click Show.7 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Structural Element may not be supported ➤ Warning 1. Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 488 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .

Analytical Checks | 489 . 9 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Circular Support Chain Detected ➤ First Warning Click Structural Framing: W-Wide Flange-Column: W18X40 ■ Click Show.The unsupported element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. Notice the column is not supported by an isolated footing. Review circular reference warnings 8 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings.

double-click Ground Level. under Structural Plans. D-2. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Design bar. 10 In the Warning dialog. 490 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . H-3. under Structural Plans. E-3. and H-4. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. double-click Level 2.■ Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. Notice that there are missing isolated footings at specific grid locations. Correct circular reference 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 13 Place an isolated footing at each of the following grid locations: E-1. Correct member supports 11 In the Project Browser. click Close. 16 Correct the placement of the structural beams as shown. Notice the highlighted beam requires an adjacent beam for support on one end. D-4.

4 Close the Warning dialog. 6 In the Warning dialog: ■ ■ Expand Zero-length Analytical Model Detected ➤ first Warning. Revit Structure checks for consistency between the analytical and physical models. Review warnings 5 Click Tools menu ➤ Review Warnings. 3 In the Warning dialog. Notice that the structural element is highlighted on the model as each warning is selected. click to view each warning. expand 3D Views. This indicates the specific element has a physical length but no analytical length.Run a consistency check 1 In the Project Browser. Click Structural Columns: W-Wide Flange-Column: W10X49 Analytical Checks | 491 . A Warning dialog appears notifying you that there are model elements that have a zero-length. 2 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. and double-click 3D.

click Close. 492 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 7 In the Warning dialog.■ ■ Click Show. In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Ground Level is selected as the value for Top Vertical Projection. The Zero-length element is highlighted and displayed in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. click . Click OK in the Viewing Tips dialog. 8 Select the column that was previously highlighted. under Analytical Model.

Correct zero-length elements 10 Enter ZF (Zoom To Fit). 11 Click or drag the ViewCube to re-orient the view until the south side of the structure is visible as shown. 12 Press CTRL.9 In the Element Properties dialog. Analytical Checks | 493 . and select the 3 columns identified in the warning dialog as shown. click OK.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top Vertical Projection. 494 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Analytical / Physical Model Consistency Check. click . Load Cases In the Structural Settings dialog. select Top of Column. 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. a new training file is provided. The following illustration shows the Structural Settings dialog with the Load Cases tab selected. 14 Under Analytical Model.13 On the Options Bar. You can save the open file if you wish. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Load Cases on page 494. you edit and add load cases. In the next exercise. This indicates the zero-length warnings have been fixed. The Warning dialog does not appear.

you add or delete load natures. Revit Structure provides several default load case types that you can use to generate loads in the model. you add. select Dead Loads. or delete load cases. The selected load case is copied in the table. then click Duplicate. 2 Click Add. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Under Category.rvt. Add a Load Case 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. and the Add button changes to Duplicate. you learn how to add new load cases. 3 Click Add. edit. Load Cases | 495 . Add a load nature 1 Click in the Load Natures table. Select an existing load case record in the table. 4 Click in the name cell of the new load case. select the Load Cases tab. A new load case is added to the bottom of the table. Revit Structure provides a default number. A new load nature record is added to the bottom of the table. NOTE You can also create a new load case with the Duplicate command. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. and rename it to Roof Hung. In this table. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM3. In this table. NOTE The Case Number column of the table is read-only. click Training Files. The second table is the Load Natures table.The first table is the Load Cases table. In this exercise.

and enter an appropriate name. 496 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . A host for a load has its own work plane. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. Adding Loads to the Model Loads are added to the model using a coordinate system. live loads. Hosts include slabs and beams. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you will be adding dead loads. Loads are placed perpendicular to the view’s current work plane. and wind loads to the model. Then you create load combinations for use by analysis and design software. and double-click View 1 .Analytical. and loads can be placed by default. expand Views (all). i_RST_SAM3-in progress. Revit Structure has several coordinate systems for loads: ■ ■ ■ project coordinate system current work plane host work plane The project coordinate system displays in the view when you click Loads on the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt.rvt Change the coordinate system orientation 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Loads to the Model on page 496. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. NOTE The new load nature is now available under the Nature column of the Load Cases table. The orientation of the project coordination is as illustrated: A view has a work plane that can be used for object placement. using the project coordinate system.3 Click in the cell of the new load nature. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 4 Click OK to close the Structural Settings dialog. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. perpendicular to the host’s work plane. In this exercise.

Use the tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. . 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Select . 9 Click the garage sloped slab. draw a zoom box around the garage sloped slab and select it. select Top of Slab for Vertical Projection. Adding Loads to the Model | 497 .2 On the View Control Bar. TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click Hidden Line. click Loads. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Analytical Model. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the model so the garage sloped slab is visible. click (Area Load).

10 On the Design Bar. select Project for Orient to. 11 Select the load. and double-click Level 2-Analytical. click (Area Load). Add an area load at level 2 using slab as host 1 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice the coordinate system indicates the load is perpendicular to the host (ramp). click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 498 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click Loads. click 13 Click OK. expand Structural Plans. The load coordinates are now parallel to the project. expand Views (all).The load is placed on the garage sloped slab. . under Structural Analysis. 3 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 2-Analytical. 5 Select the Level 2 slab perimeter as shown. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.TIP Be sure to click the Area Load with Host option. and click OK. under Structural Plans. click Loads. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. Adding Loads to the Model | 499 . Add wind load at Level 2 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify to exit the Loads tool. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Right-click on the load you placed. and click Element Properties. select Area Load: Area Load 1.0300 ksf for the Fz 1 parameter. 4 In the Type Selector. enter -0.

click (Line Load). 15 In the Element Properties dialog.0400 kip/ft for Fx 1 500 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 13 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Properties dialog.11 On the Options Bar. enter Wind Load. TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. click Modify. do the following: ■ ■ Enter 0 kip/ft for Fz 1 Enter 0. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. click Duplicate. 14 Right-click on the Line Load 1. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. click Edit/New. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting Line Load 1. and click Element Properties. 12 Sketch a line load from one corner of the slab to the other. and click OK. TIP You may need to press TAB to highlight the line load.

expand 3D Views. Adding Loads to the Model | 501 . 21 Select . double-click Level 2 . draw a zoom box around the beams on the east side of the structure as shown. and double-click View 1 . and click OK. under Structural Plans.■ Select WIND1(3) for Load Case. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. expand Views (all).Analytical. and click Hidden Line.Analytical in order to view the added loads. 20 In the Project Browser.

click Grid. 23 Draw a temporary grid as shown. 502 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling .22 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

25 Place the framing elevation symbol so that it will snap to the temporary grid approximately as shown. 26 On the Design bar. click Modify. 24 On the View tab of the Design bar. click Framing Elevation. 29 Select . Adding Loads to the Model | 503 . 28 Double-click the new elevation bubble.This grid is drawn for reference only. 27 Select the temporary grid. The elevation view opens. and will be deleted in a later step. draw a zoom box around the lower floors of the structure as shown. and press DELETE.

as shown. and click OK. The load projection plane is now oriented to the workplane of the temporary grid line plane to which the framing elevation was pointing. click Loads. Use the Tooltips to be sure you click the correct option. 33 Drawing the load from one corner of the flange to the other. and on the Options Bar. 504 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click . TIP Be sure to click the Line Load option. 31 On the Options Bar. select the edge of the flange as the starting point for the load. You will see the load is oriented to project orientation. under Structural Analysis. 32 On Level 2.30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Workplane for Orient to. 34 Select the load. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Line Load).

click the Load Combinations tab. 6 Under Factor. 9 Under Factor. 5 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 10 Under Case or Combination. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog.36 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 1. Load Combination In this exercise. you add a load combination to your model for use by the analysis and design software. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Load Combination on page 505.6. You edit and add load combinations in the Structural Settings dialog. and click Add. Notice that the Formula field under Load Combination changed automatically to show the new factor.4. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. select DL1.rvt. select LL1.rvt Add a DL + LL combination 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Click Add in the Load Combination section. Load Combination | 505 . and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_SAM3-in progress. 4 Under Name. enter DL+LL. 7 Under Case or Combination. click Structural Settings. 8 Click Add. enter 1.

18 Under Case or Combination. and click Add. 22 Click on the Load Combination table. Add a WIND1 combination with a factor 19 Click Add in the Edit Selected Formula table. Add a LL1 combination with a factor 16 Click Add. enter 0.3. 17 Under Factor. 21 Under Case or Combination. enter DL+LL+WIND.2. select Envelope. 14 Under Factor. 23 Select Row 2. 506 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 13 Click on the Edit Selected Formula table. 25 Under State. 12 Under Name. enter 1. 24 Under Type. and enter 1. and click Add.Add a DL + LL + wind combination with a factor 11 Click on the Load Combination table. select WIND1. select DL1.5. select Ultimate. 15 Under Case or Combination. select LL1. 20 Under Factor.

Scroll down the list of items. 3 In the Select Items to Copy dialog.26 In the Structural Settings dialog. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Transfer Project Standards. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ Under Copy from. and select Load Types. Transfer Project Standards on page 507. Click Check None. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Transfer Project Standards | 507 . you transfer the load combination table to a new or existing project. i_RST_SAM3-in progress. click OK. Transfer Project Standards In this exercise. select the file that contains the load table.rvt Importing load types and combinations from a previous project 1 Open an existing Revit Structure project or create a new project.

508 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click the Load Combinations tab. 4 In the Duplicate Types dialog.■ Click OK. 6 On the Structural Settings dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. click Overwrite.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and creating an analytical schedule. Use the project file that you saves at the end of that exercise. Documenting the Analytical Model on page 509. 3 Click the Wind Load to place the tag. Documenting the Analytical Model In this exercise. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Level 2 Analytical.rvt Add annotation 1 In the Project Browser. expand Structural Plans. expand Views (all). i_RST_SAM3-in progress. you document the analysis by adding an annotation.The load combinations are displayed. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. Documenting the Analytical Model | 509 .

5 On the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 Click on the drag control for the wind load tag and position approximately as shown.4 Click the Area Load to place the tag. click Modify.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Fields tab. 11 Using the same process. 10 Under Available fields. select Fx 1 and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. The Fx 1 field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Fx 2 Fy 1 Fy 2 Fz 1 Fz 2 Nature 12 Under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click View. Documenting the Analytical Model | 511 .Create a load schedule 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the New Schedule dialog. Define the fields 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Line Loads and click OK. right-click on the Design Bar. under Category.

under Structural Plans. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model There are some structural configurations that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 2 Zoom into the column at grid line F . Manual adjustment is required before a structural model is input into the analysis and design software.3. For this reason. In addition. 512 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Ground Level . Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model on page 512.Analytical.13 Click OK. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Revit Structure provides a reset tool to reset analytical models back to their original location relative to the corresponding physical model. the geometry of the analytical model may be adjusted in relation to those elements that it joins. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 14 Click File menu ➤ Save. i_RST_SAM3-in progress.rvt Align the analytical beam 1 In the Project Browser. A schedule is created that includes the analytical elements in the project.

5 Press TAB. 4 Press TAB. Examples of Analytical Adjustment and Reset in the Model | 513 .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Analytical Model ➤ Adjust Analytical Model. and select the endpoint of the analytical line of the beam. and select the corner endpoint of the analytical plane of the slab.

The analytical model lines and planes are now connected at the same location for analysis purposes. a new training file is provided. setting both planes to level 2 as shown: ■ Creating columns Places the analytical model of columns and walls in the same plane as shown: ■ Creating slabs and walls 514 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . In the next exercise. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model The analytical model that is generated in Revit Structure has discrepancies that are not suitable for direct integration with structural analysis and design software. 6 Click File menu ➤ Close. NOTE The auto-detect feature automatically adjusts the analytical model when creating the following structural elements within a project. ■ Creating beams The corresponding beam to slab projection planes are matched. You can save the open file if you wish. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model on page 514. Revit Structure provides the capability to automatically adjust the analytical model to reduce or eliminate these discrepancies for newly created elements as well as the ability to disassociate or reassociate the auto-detect parameter for existing elements. For example. 7 Proceed to the next exercise.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 515 . the top or bottom plane of the wall’s analytical model will coincide with the slab analytical model as shown: If a wall has a portion that extends beyond the roof (commonly known as parapets). despite any variation in wall thicknesses or projection plane location as shown: If a wall and slab are joined. it can be excluded in the wall’s analytical model to exclude loads that extend above a level with framing members.Aligns the vertical and horizontal analytical projection plane of walls.

They include distances for the analytical-to-physical model and analytical adjustments. click Training Files.rvt.If the analytical edge of slab coincides with the beam or wall analytical model. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Auto_Detect. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the exterior of the wall can be defined as the analytical projection plane. Auto-detect tolerances 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Structural Settings. select the Analytical Model Settings tab. 3 Click OK. or it can be trimmed back the analytical/physical model of the slab as shown: NOTE The following adjustments to the analytical model are applied to an existing project to better demonstrate the auto-detect feature. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Structural Settings dialog. 516 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and the auto-detect tolerances for both horizontal and vertical planes. This exercise applies the auto-detect feature within the tolerances specified in this dialog.

click . 5 Move the cursor over the top of the beam as shown. 2 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the lower-left corner of the structure 3 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. double-click Level 2. 4 On the Toolbar. click as shown. and draw a zoom box around one of the beams. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 517 . .Adjust the beam to slab vertical offset 1 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans.

select Auto-detect. and then click OK. represents the vertical projection plane of the beam analytical model. click . click . under Analytical Model. a single beam is selected 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Vertical Projection.The dot located at the top of the beam. for Vertical Projection. The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. NOTE The properties for all beams of the same type should be changed. For demo purposes. select Top of Slab. and then click OK. 8 Click the slab. under Analytical Model. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 518 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 6 Click the beam. and on the Option Bar. and on the Option Bar.

and click Zoom in Region. right-click. double-click Level 2 . and draw a zoom box around the column at grid location A3. Notice the green line representing the analytical model of the concrete wall is not aligned with the blue dot representing the analytical model of the column. 12 In an empty part of the drawing area.The vertical projection plane of the analytical model automatically moves to the top of the slab. Adjust the column to wall horizontal offset 10 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 11 On the Toolbar. 13 Draw a zoom box around the column as shown.Analytical. The dot located at the top of the slab. represents the vertical projection plane of the analytical model. click . Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 519 .

and on the Option Bar. click . under Analytical Model. 18 On the Toolbar.14 Click the column. double-click Level 2. aligns with the horizontal projection plane of the wall. click (Join Geometry). select the wall. and then select the column. 520 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and draw a zoom box around the elevator shaft located on the lower-right side of the structure as shown. 16 On the Tools toolbar. The horizontal projection plane for the column. select Auto-detect. for Horizontal Projection. click . The geometry of the column and wall are now joined. and then click OK. Adjust the vertical alignment of different wall types 17 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

19 Double-click the section bubble to open the section view. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 521 .

for Horizontal Projection. Check the Status Bar to verify you are selecting the chain of walls and not a single wall. The dotted green line represents reference plane 1. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Chain of Walls or Lines. select Auto-detect. and then click OK. These lines represent the vertical projection plane of the upper and lower wall analytical model. 20 Move the cursor over the lower wall. 22 On the Option Bar. 21 Press TAB. under Analytical Model.Notice the solid green lines are not aligned. 522 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . click .

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 523 . and then click OK. select Plane 1. click . and on the Option Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In an empty part of the drawing area. 26 Click the upper wall. right-click. under Analytical Model. 25 Draw a zoom box around the center of the upper and lower walls as shown. and click Zoom in Region.The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the upper wall. for Horizontal Projection.

The vertical projection plane for both the upper and lower walls are now aligned with vertical projection plane 1. 29 In an empty part of the drawing area. right-click. 524 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Section 3. Adjust the vertical alignment of a wall and slab 28 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). and click Zoom in Region. 30 Draw a zoom box around the intersection of the beam and column.

Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 525 . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Bottom of Slab. and on the Option Bar. under Analytical Model.The brown line represents the analytical model of the slab. click . under Analytical Model. for Vertical Projection. and then click OK. The vertical projection plane for the lower wall is now aligned with the horizontal projection plane of the slab. and on the Option Bar. and the green line represents the analytical model of the wall. click . 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. for Top Vertical Projection. Adjust the horizontal alignment of the slab to wall 33 Click the slab. select Auto-detect. 31 Click the lower wall. Notice the green line extends to the top of the beam.

under Analytical Model. 41 In the Project Browser ➤ Sections (Building Section). and then click Open View. and then click OK. for Horizontal Projection. 40 On the Design Bar. 37 Select the left sketch line of the slab as shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . double-click Section 3. click . and on the Option Bar. and on the Option Bar. click . select Exterior Face. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Revit dialog. Notice the analytical line of the wall moves with the analytical line of the slab. click Finish Sketch. select Structural Plan: Level 2 . for Analytical Slab Edge. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. You are now in sketch mode and the slab perimeter appears in the drawing area. select Auto-detect. click .The horizontal projection plane for the slab (brown line) is now aligned with the vertical projection plane of the wall (green line). under Analytical Model. 35 Click the slab. 42 Click the lower wall.Analytical. 38 On the Option Bar. click No. 36 In the Go to View dialog.

for Top Vertical Projection. click . 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Analytical Model. select Auto-Detect Horizontal Projection. and on the Option Bar.The horizontal projection plane of the slab is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall. and on the Option Bar. and then click OK. click . 46 Click the lower wall. Adjust the column to the lower wall analytical projection 44 Click the column. and then click OK. under Analytical Model. select Top of Wall. Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 527 .

double-click Level 3. and draw a zoom box around the beam located in the upper-left corner of both views as shown. 51 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click . 52 On the Toolbar.Analytical. Close any additional open windows. 528 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 49 Enter ZF.The vertical projection plane of the column (blue line) is now aligned with the exterior face of the wall (green line). Both windows will be visible in the drawing area. double-click Level 3 . Adjust the horizontal alignment of a beam 48 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans. 50 In the Project Browser ➤ Structural Plans.

53 Click the beam. for Horizontal Projection. and then click OK. ■ Examples of Automatic Adjustment in the Analytical Model | 529 . Extend each end of the beam as shown. under Analytical Model. select Auto-Detect. and on the Option Bar. . Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the shape handle and not the beam. do the following: ■ ■ Move the cursor over the beam. and select the beam shape handle. Press TAB. 55 In the Level 3 window. 54 In the Element Properties dialog. click Notice the beam is highlighted in both open views.

Boundary Conditions on page 531. You can save the open file if you wish. 530 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . 57 Proceed to the next exercise.Notice the beam in the analytical view remains unchanged. In the next exercise. 56 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is provided.

Boundary Conditions In this exercise. Boundary Conditions | 531 . click Boundary Conditions. double-click View 1 . Add a point boundary condition to the base of a column 1 In the Project Browser ➤ 3D Views. 7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 In an empty part of the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. 4 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. clear Structural Foundation. click Training Files. click (Point Boundary Condition). 11 Click the end of the blue line (representing the analytical model of the beam) to place the point boundary condition. right-click.rvt. you add a boundary condition to your model for use by the analysis and design software. and open Imperial\i_RST_SAM_Boundary_Conditions. click Apply. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Zoom in Region. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Draw a zoom box around the base of one of the columns. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Zoom in Region. 2 Enter ZF. select Fixed.Analytical. 6 Draw a zoom box around the columns located on the lower-left side of the structure as shown. and for State. under Visibility. right-click. and then click OK.

for State. click .12 Repeat this technique to add a fixed boundary condition to the next closest beam as shown. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Click one of the boundary condition symbols. 532 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . under Structural Analysis. and then click OK. 14 On the Option Bar. and select the other symbol. press CTRL. select Pinned.

Boundary Conditions | 533 . click (Line Boundary Condition).Notice the boundary condition now displays a pinned state symbol. Add a line boundary condition to the footing 16 Enter ZF. 21 Click the green line (representing the analytical model of the foundation) to place the line boundary condition. 20 On the Options Bar. click . click Boundary Conditions. 17 Click or drag the ViewCube to rotate the view until the foundation wall is displayed as shown. and for State. select Pinned. 18 On the Toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the foundation. 19 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

You can open the analysis software or write to an export file for later use. 2 Proceed to the next tutorial. including structural plans. Export the model to analysis software 1 Click Tools menu ➤ External Tools ➤ Send Model. If you choose to have the API open the software and run your model. that you confirm in the analysis software. a new training file is provided. some internal analysis software parameters are imported into Revit Structure. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE The External Tools menu is only available once an approved 3rd party analysis software application has been installed. via an Application Programming Interface (API). are imported back into Revit Structure. Exporting Revit Structure Files on page 535. or member addition. sections. For more information. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software Revit Structure links to an analysis and design software. the API also returns you to your Revit Structure model and updates it. In addition. Preparing the Analytical Model to be Calculated in Third Party Analysis Software on page 534. Size changes to your model and geometric modifications to your model involving member deletion. elevations. click Help ➤ Structural Analysis Partners. 534 | Chapter 14 Structural Analytical Modelling . and detail sheets are updated according to changes that you import into Revit Structure. The application programming interface (API) starts. member relocation. In the next exercise. All views.22 Click File menu ➤ Close.

sheet. you learn how to export your project into both 2D and 3D formats for improved coordination with architects and engineers.Exporting Revit Structure Files 15 Your Revit Structure 2009 project can be exported into several different AutoCAD formats. Exporting CAD Formats In this lesson. Export CAD formats 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. section.). you export sheets from the project and import them into AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 as 2D images. and open Imperial\i_RST_Export. elevation. etc. Finally.Atrium. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit Structure.rvt. You can export a 2D view (plan. maintains the properties of all structural elements as true AutoCAD Architecture objects. and double-click 3D . click Training Files. you begin by exporting a 3D view of the structural model as a DWG format and importing the file into AutoCAD Architecture 2007. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then select a 2D structural plan view and export the file as a DWG format. or schedule into AutoCAD. You can also export the project drawing sheets and import them as 2D images. or you can export a 3D view directly into AutoCAD Architecture. which is imported into AutoCAD 2007. In this tutorial. 535 .

■ ■ Click Options.2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. click Short. do the following: ■ Under Solids (3D views only). select Export as AutoCAD Architecture and AutoCAD MEP Options. Under Save as type. 3 In the Export dialog.dwg). 4 In the Export Options dialog. 536 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. Under File naming. The existing file name is automatically shortened. select a folder on your local computer. NOTE You can only export the 3D model in a 3D view. select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*.

7 Click File menu ➤ Open. View the 3D file in AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Open AutoCAD Architecture 2007. Click OK. and click Open. Exporting the 3D Model to AutoCAD Architecture 2007 | 537 . 5 On the Export dialog.■ ■ Under Prefer. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture. 8 Navigate to the file location. select AutoCAD Architecture objects. click Save.

Revit Structure columns. 11 In Revit Structure. 10 Minimize the AutoCAD Architecture program. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. beams. and notice it is a true AutoCAD Architecture structural element. and save the model to a location of your choice using the following filename: i_RST_Export-in progress. click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt.When the file is opened in AutoCAD Architecture 2007. and braces are converted to the corresponding type of AutoCAD Architecture structural member. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD on page 539 538 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 9 Select a beam as shown. the Revit Structure model appears as shown.

Click Save. and double-click Level 2. i_RST_Export-in progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. click Long (Specify prefix for all exports). Under File name. Under Save as type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Save in. select a folder on your local computer. clear the existing name and enter Framing Plan Level 2. 1 In the Project Browser. Under File naming.rvt.dwg). select AutoCAD 2007 DWG Files (*. expand Structural Plans. 3 In the Export dialog. Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD | 539 .Exporting a 2D view to AutoCAD Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise.

When the file is opened in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007. click File menu ➤ Save. On the View’s export mode dialog. 8 In Revit Structure. 6 Navigate to the file location. Exporting Sheets on page 540 Exporting Sheets Training File ■ Continue to use the training file that was saved in the previous exercise. click Hidden Line Removal. View the 2D file 4 Maximize the AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 program. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.If the view was set to wireframe. and click Open. i_RST_Export-in progress. 540 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. a warning dialog appears. the Revit Structure exported Level 3 Plan appears. 7 Minimize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program.

click Selected views/sheets ➤ Select. you can flatten xrefs by selecting the Export each view or sheet as a single file option as shown. clear Views. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Under Show. Select each sheet. Click No when asked if you want to save the settings for use in a future Revit session. do the following: ■ ■ Under Save in. click Save. 3 In the View/Sheet Set dialog. Exporting Sheets | 541 . Under Export Range. 2 In the Export dialog. This option is automatically selected for DXF files and not available for DGN or SAT files. 4 On the Export dialog. select a folder on your local computer.Export sheets 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. NOTE If you are exporting to a DWG file.

navigate to a folder of your preference and rename the file. 542 | Chapter 15 Exporting Revit Structure Files .If the view was set to wireframe. and click Open. a warning dialog appears. 8 Navigate to the location of the files saved in the previous exercise. View the Revit Structure sheets in AutoCAD 2007 or AutoCAD Architecture 2007 6 Maximize the AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture program. 5 Close the Revit Structure file. On the View’s export mode dialog. click Hidden Line Removal. If you wish to save the changes. 7 Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Revit Structure cannot export to earlier releases of AutoCAD Architecture.

Exporting Sheets | 543 . they appear as shown.When the sheets are opened in AutoCAD or AutoCAD Architecture.

544 .

each with a different size. 545 . you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. because there is only one file to track. Walls. Using the Family Editor. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Structure and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. The different file types become much easier to manage. You also learn about the Family Editor.About Families and the Family Editor 16 All elements in Revit Structure 2009 are “family based. In this tutorial. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. thus the term family. and when and how to use it. and roofs are examples of these types of families. if you create a family called wide beams that includes types with several sizes. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. exceptions to this rule. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Structure is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.rfa extension. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Structure recognize it as a particular component type. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. There are. Even though various types within a family can look different. You provide the information necessary to describe uniquely the family geometry. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. In this lesson. they are still related and come from a single source.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Structure to help you manage your data and make changes easily. material set. In addition. For example. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects required to create the particular family type. such as a curved beam. shape. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . however.

Family templates are either host-based or standalone. and beam. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a component family based on a variety of family templates. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. 546 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. but you cannot create new system families.Revit Structure has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Structure and comprise principle building components such as walls. foundation. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. generic. and roofs. exterior. The basic walls system family. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Standalone families include columns. while many more are stored in component libraries. for example. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. and partition wall styles. floors. has wall types that define interior.

You can load them into projects. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. and also a standalone pile cap family component. You create in-place families only within the current project. Introduction to Families | 547 .Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . and save them from a project file to your library if needed. The following illustration shows host-based openings in a wall. custom step footing. The following illustration shows an in-place step footing. for example. transfer them from one project to another. and the category that you use determines the appearance and display control of the component within the project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project.rfa extension.

how to access it. if you change the original family. In this exercise. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. you can drag it into the document window. such as plan. 548 | Chapter 16 About Families and the Family Editor . as well as the level of detail associated with that view.Add a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. you learn when to use the Family Editor. how to access it. elevation. In this section. 2 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. or 3D. you learn about the Family Editor. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. To add a family to your project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. you learned about the different types of Revit Structure families and when to use them. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. it is saved with the project. and when to use it. After the family has been loaded in the project. However. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. In the final exercise. Load Family command on the File menu. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects.

Introduction to the Family Editor | 549 . modify it as needed. if you have exhausted your external resources. 2 If there is not a component family loaded in the project. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. 9 Save the newly defined family. In this case. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with subcategory and entity visibility settings. Within the Windows® environment. 2 Define subcategories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. With Revit Structure open. and then load it into the project. try to find the component that most closely resembles it. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. If you find a close match. open it in the Family Editor. presume it is a bay window that you require. you will need a specific component for your design. you can double-click any file with an . How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. such as newsgroups. it opens within the Family Editor.rfa extension and it opens Revit Structure in the Family Editor. 3 Next. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. and click Open. When the family opens. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 4 If you cannot find the component you require. select the appropriate template. and click Open. Also consider any internal family libraries that exist on the network. create a component family using one of the family templates as a starting point.When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you can click File ➤ Open. 5 Finally. There is a logical thought process to follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. it will be available within the Type Selector. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. consider checking the Web library and other Web resources. It will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. navigate to a family file. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. To start a new family.

550 .

a custom castellated beam.Creating Components in the Family Editor 17 In this tutorial.rft file). you learn how to create specific Revit Structure 2009 Families. you modify the profile for a non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib. and an in-place family for a step-footing. In the second exercise. you create a custom. Creating Custom Families In this lesson. you create it within the project file. a reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. non-composite metal deck family by adding a dovetail rib to the deck profile. a custom titleblock. In the first exercise. you customize 2 different families with the Revit Structure family editor. 551 . you create the following families: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ a custom metal deck profile. Using the installed templates. When you create an in-place family. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family In this exercise. Modifications to the existing families are saved as a family (. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam family. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. not within the Family template (.rft) template for use in other projects.

select 1 1/2" = 1' 0" for scale. and open Imperial\Form Deck_Non Composite. 5 In an empty part of the drawing area. and press DELETE. Delete vertical reference planes 7 Select parameter wr as shown.Open the metal deck family profile 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Zoom to Fit.rfa. click Training Files. click Dimensions and Reference Planes. and then click OK. 552 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Delete the same parameter on the opposite side of the profile. 8 Delete additional vertical reference planes until the view appears as shown. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Apply. right-click. 4 On the Annotations Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility Graphics.

click Modify. 11 Place a dimension for the angle as follows: Click the horizontal reference plane. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 553 .Modify the angular reference plane 9 On the Design Bar. Click the angle. and click to place the dimension as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. click ■ ■ ■ (Create Angular Dimensions). Move the cursor inside the profile. 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

and click Zoom to Fit. 15 In an empty part of the drawing area. and press ENTER. and drag them approximately as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. Repeat this technique to add a dimension for the angle on the opposite side of the profile. 14 Select the angular dimension and click the lock symbol to lock the angle to the horizontal reference plane. right-click. select 6" = 1' 0" for scale.13 Select the angled reference plane. 554 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 66. 17 Click the top and bottom dimensions.

and add a dimension as shown. and press DELETE. Repeat for the dimension on the opposite side. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 555 . Place new dimensions 19 On the Design Bar.18 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the profile base. click Dimension.

select Not a Reference. and then click OK. and draw a zoom box around the top of the profile. for Is Reference. under Other. click . 24 Press ESC. click Dimension. 26 On the Element Properties dialog. and click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints. Sketch the dovetail reference planes 21 On the View Toolbar. 25 Select the reference planes and on the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 556 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 On the Design Bar. Dimension and constrain the dovetail 27 On the Design Bar. click . 28 Add a dimension from the top of the profile to the dovetail horizontal reference plane as shown.20 Add 2 dimensions from the center reference plane to the bottom of each side of the profile as shown. 23 Draw 1 horizontal and 4 vertical reference planes approximately as shown.

The dimensions displayed in the following steps are provided for reference only and can be customized based on your requirements. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 557 . click the dimension. 33 Click the EQ symbol to constrain the dimensions as shown. 30 Select the horizontal reference plane. and enter 0' 11/32". and press ENTER. 32 Repeat the previous technique to add the remaining dimensions for the dovetail as shown. 29 Press ESC. 31 Select the dimension line. and click the lock symbol to lock the distance to the horizontal reference plane. These dimensions refer to the positioning of the dovetail in relation to the profile center reference plane.

38 Using the split tool. and click Delete Inner Segment. click Lines. trace the line between the dovetail and the existing element as shown. 37 On the Tools toolbar click (Split). 558 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Press ESC. Create parameters a and b 40 Select the lower dovetail dimension as shown. 35 Sketch the dovetail by snapping to the intersections of the vertical and horizontal reference planes as shown. 36 Click Modify.Sketch the dovetail 34 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 559 . click Label ➤ Add Parameter.41 On the Options Bar. under Parameter Data. 42 In the Parameters Properties dialog. 43 Select the upper dovetail dimension as shown. enter a for Name. 45 In the Parameters Properties dialog. and then click OK. and then click OK. under Parameter Data. enter b for Name. 44 On the Options Bar. click Label ➤ Add Parameter.

enter 0' 4 1/2". click Family Types. and OK. select 2" X 6". and select wr.Define wr parameter 46 On the Design Bar. for a. Flex the new dovetail profile 50 On the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . do the following. Click Apply. 51 In the Family Types dialog. for wr. click Family Types. ■ Under Other. click Label. Under Other. 49 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Family Types dialog. enter 0' 2". do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 48 Select the dimension as shown.

60 In the New Project dialog. 63 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Under Other. enter 0' 2". under Structural Plans. 58 Click File ➤ Save. select Rename. 61 In the Choose Template dialog. Click Apply. and click Open. The slab size should be approximately 55' 0" long by 35' 0" wide. click Lines. 65 On the Design Bar. Under Other. 55 Click Profiles ➤ Structural folder. click OK. and then click OK. click Save the new profile 53 Click File ➤ Save As. for a. Under Other. and click OK. enter 0' 5". 57 In the Family Types dialog. click Finish Sketch. for b. for b. Notice that the dovetail adjusts automatically to the new parameters. enter Form Deck_Non Composite_Dovetail. You are now in sketch mode. 54 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. 62 In the New Project dialog. click (Rectangle). and click Save. 64 On the Design Bar. Under Family Types. enter 0' 2 1/2". click Family Types. Creating a Custom Metal Deck Family | 561 . click Slab. Create new parameters 56 On the Design Bar. and enter 2" x 5". Click Apply. Create a new project 59 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Browse. 68 On the Design Bar. and for File Name. do the following. in the Imperial Templates folder. double-click Level 2. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ (Undo). click the Imperial Library folder. select Structural Analysis-Default. Under Other.rte. 52 On the Toolbar. 67 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area.rfa. for Sr. 66 On the Options Bar. enter 0' 2 1/2".

click Section. under Sections (Building Sections). select Fine. 71 In the Project Browser. 73 On the View Control toolbar. 72 Select the slab. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Scale. Create a section view of the slab 69 On the Design Bar. 562 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Detail Level. double-click Section 1. select Floor: 3" LW Concrete on 2" Composite Metal Deck. For Model Graphic Style. and in the Type Selector. select Wireframe.The slab is created. 70 Click above the slab and draw a section line through the slab approximately as shown. select 1" = 1' 0".

The new profile is applied to the slab. Under Structural Deck Properties. select Edit for Structure. 80 In the Type Properties dialog. 79 In the Edit Assembly dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The new non-composite metal deck family is loaded into the slab project. double-click Section 1. select the slab project from the available files. 76 Select the slab. and on the Options Bar. 83 Proceed to the next exercise. Customizing a Castellated Beam In this exercise. under Construction. and open the new family file. 78 In the Type Properties dialog. open the file from the saved folder location. click OK. and open Imperial\i_RST_Custom_Beam. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sections. do the following. Customizing a Castellated Beam on page 563. click Load into Project.rvt. you create a custom opening in a castellated beam.Apply the custom family to the metal deck 74 Click the Window menu. click OK. click Edit/New. ■ ■ ■ . The file should still be open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 75 On the Families Design Bar. click Training Files. select the new metal deck profile file. Click OK. Customizing a Castellated Beam | 563 . If it is not. Under Layers. click 77 In the Element Properties dialog. If there are multiple files open. select Layer 3. for Deck profile. 82 In the Project Browser.

. and draw a zoom box around one of the openings in the 2 Select the beam. Refer to the following diagram to identify and define the parameters for the beam opening. dt1 = Tee depth top beam. and on the Options Bar. . click Edit/New. click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. e2 = Space between voids (web post length). ■ ■ ■ ■ e1 = Tee length. 564 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . b = Length of sloped portion. 4 Position both dialogs so the opening is visible in the drawing area as shown.Modify the beam opening 1 On the Options Bar. click castellated beam.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For e1. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. under Construction. and then click OK. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 565 . enter 0' 4". Click Apply. Sketch the rebar 3 On the Design Bar. enter 0' 3". 6 In the Element Properties dialog.rft. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout In this exercise. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout on page 565.■ dt2 = Tee depth bottom beam. For dt1. For dt2. Notice the opening in the beam changes based on the new parameters. enter 0' 6". For e2. and open Imperial\2D Rebar Shape Template. click OK. enter 0' 3". Open the 2-dimensional (2D) rebar family 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. enter 0' 5 1/2". 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a custom reinforcement layout with overlapping rebar. click Training Files. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For b. click Rebar Lines.

■ Click and draw a vertical line to create the inside loop. 566 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .4 On the Options Bar. as follows: Click to the right of the vertical reference plane. ■ Click and draw a second horizontal line to create the bottom of the rebar. 5 Draw the overlapping rebar as one continuous line. and draw a horizontal line to create the top surface of the rebar. click ■ (Draw).

8 Place dimensions on the rebar sketch as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 567 . click Dimension. Place dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Click and draw a second vertical line to create the outside loop. ■ Click and draw a horizontal line to complete the rebar sketch.

568 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Make sure you snap to the reference plane when placing the dimensions. for Label. 12 Select the inside vertical rebar dimension as shown. select B. 11 On the Options Bar. Create parameter labels 10 Select the upper horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 9 Press ESC.

select C. select D. for Label. 16 Select the outside vertical rebar dimension as shown. for Label. 14 Select the bottom horizontal rebar dimension as shown. 15 On the Options Bar.13 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 569 .

18 Select the inner horizontal rebar dimension as shown. in the Choose Template dialog. select Structural Analysis-Default. Create a new project 23 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 22 In the Save As dialog. 25 In the Imperial Templates folder. 26 In the New Project dialog. 21 Navigate to a folder of your choice. select C. click OK.17 On the Options Bar. Save the new profile 20 Click File ➤ Save As. select B. for File name. 19 On the Options Bar. for Label. enter Square. and click Save. click Browse. 24 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. 570 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rte. for Label.

If it is not. and corresponds to the shape specified on the Options bar. The active rebar shape is highlighted. Launch the rebar shape browser 36 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The slab is created. The Rebar Shape Browser launches. open the file from the saved folder location. 30 On the Options Bar. 34 On the Families Design Bar. NOTE You can launch or close the Rebar Shape Browser by clicking Place rebar parallel to the slab on the Options Bar. under Structural Plans. click Finish Sketch. The file should still be open. and be certain that the Square. click Rebar ➤ Place Rebar Parallel. The new overlapping rebar family is now loaded into the slab project. 37 Click on the Rebar Shape Browser. 31 Draw a slab in the center of the drawing area. Load the overlapping rebar into the new project 33 Click the Window menu. and click OK.rfa file is open. click (Rectangle). Sketch a slab 28 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. positioned in the right-side of the drawing area. select the new project. 29 On the Design Bar. click Slab. click Load into Projects.27 In the Project Browser. click Lines. You are now in Sketch mode. and select Rebar Shape: Square. 35 In the Load into Projects dialog. Creating a Custom Reinforcement Layout | 571 . 32 On the Design Bar. This browser provides multiple rebar shape types that can be placed within the specified host. scroll down the list of available shapes.

select Near Cover Reference.38 On the Options Bar. select Rebar Bar: #10. for Placement Plane. 42 Click ESC. 39 In the Type Selector. Notice that the rebar shape is positioned over the slab. 44 Select the rebar. Modify rebar layout 43 On the View Control Bar. 41 Click to place the rebar. select Detail Level: Fine. 40 Hover over the section view. 572 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating In-Place Families | 573 . 45 Select one of the shape handles and change the position or shape of the rebar as shown. click Modify. 47 Proceed to the next lesson. Because in-place families interact with the structural model according to their assigned family category.rft) template. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. you start with an incomplete foundation wall. you create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family (. Creating In-Place Families on page 573. 46 On the Design Bar.Notice that the rebar shape handles appear.

you create a step footing on an existing foundation wall. click . and open Imperial\i_RST_In-Place-Footing. The footing is placed at the base of the foundation wall. 6 On the Options Bar. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. click Training Files. 4 Click the foundation wall. Create new family category 5 In the Project Browser. 574 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Place the foundation wall 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family In this exercise. and draw a zoom box around the foundation steps as shown. click Foundation ➤ Wall.36" x 12". select Wall Foundation: Bearing Footing . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Selector.

8 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. Make sure the entire footing is selected. click Create.7 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 Press TAB. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 575 . select Structural Foundations. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. select Pick a plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter Structural Foundations 1 for Name. Sketch the extrusion 13 Click the corner of the footing to start the extrusion sketch as shown. and select the bearing footing as shown.

24 On the Options Bar. 576 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. enter -3' 0". for Name. 21 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. select Concrete . click Extrusion Properties. and select Multiple. 19 In the Materials dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and then click OK. Change extrusion properties 17 On the Design Bar.Cast-in-Place Concrete. click OK. 25 Click the corner of the step foundation and the extrusion as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. click . Copy extrusion 23 Select the extrusion. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Depth. 22 On the Family Design Bar. click Modify. sketch a solid extrusion as shown.14 Using the drawing tools provided with Revit Structure. click the value for Material. The dimensions have been added for reference purposes only.

Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 577 . 27 Click to place a third copy of the extrusion as shown.26 Click to place a second copy of the extrusion as shown.

Join extrusion elements to the footing 29 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 30 Select the wall foundation as shown. and click Multiple Join.28 Press ESC. click (Join Geometry). 578 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 31 Select the lower extrusion as shown.

36 Select the middle extrusion as shown. 37 Select the lower extrusion as shown. click (Join Geometry). Creating a Step Footing In-Place Family | 579 . click Modify.33 Select the upper extrusion as shown. Join extrusion elements to each other 34 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Multiple Join.

580 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .38 Select the upper extrusion as shown. 40 In the Project Browser. click 3D Views ➤ 3D. 39 Press ESC.

Sketch the inside border 3 On the Design Bar. and enter -1/2" for Offset. click Lines. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. click .rft. Creating a Titleblock Family | 581 . text. The titleblock has linework. and your project data. The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. navigate to the Titleblocks folder. 4 On the Options Bar. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the D-size titleblock template.Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Titleblock. and labels. select D . and click Open. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. 5 Specify the upper-left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom D-size sheet. 2 In the New dialog. graphics.36 x 24. and then specify the lower-right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

10 Draw a horizontal line 4'' below the upper inside border as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 582 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . click 9 Enter 0 for Offset. .Add vertical and horizontal lines 6 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 3'' below the last horizontal line as shown. 12 Draw a horizontal line 3'' above the lower inside border as shown. and enter 4 1/2" for Offset.

24 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. click . 14 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. and. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 583 . NOTE The wide line style is not visible until the titleblock is loaded into a new project. 22 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 15 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. select the second and third horizontal lines. while pressing CTRL. 17 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 3/4'' above the existing line. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. click Modify. click Lines. 19 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 1/2'' below the existing line. 20 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 26 On the Design Bar. select Title Blocks. and enter 0' 1/2" for Offset. enter 3/4" for Offset. 25 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. select Wide Lines. 21 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.13 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 27 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 18 On the Options Bar.

and click Open. 2 In the Open dialog. and click OK. click Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Zoom in on the logo. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click . enter 3/8" for Text Size. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 584 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 In the Name dialog. and labels to your titleblock. click Edit/New.jpg. navigate to Training/Common. 11 Click OK twice. 3 Place the image in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown.The titleblock linework is now complete. you add a company logo. and select Bold. Create a new 3/8'' text style 5 On the Design Bar. text notes. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. select Company Logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. enter 3/8" Bold for Name. click Duplicate. click Import/Link ➤ Image. 6 On the Options Bar.

and drag the text note down as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. in the text box. and select the last text note. click Modify. select Text: Text Note 1.Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. Press ENTER to add each new line of text. 17 On the Design Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 585 . 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and add an address and phone number as shown.

25 Click inside the Consultant text group. select Constrain and Multiple. address. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify. and select the consultant text note. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 586 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Edit toolbar. click . Add consultant name.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification.

29 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the second copied text note location. and enter Sheet Number. enter 3/16" for Text Size. under Text. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click .26 Move the cursor down 4''. enter 3/16" for Name. 36 Draw a text box in the lower-right space of the titleblock. click Edit/New. and click OK. 32 In the Name dialog. 34 Click OK twice. select Text: 3/16". 27 Move the cursor down another 4''. click Duplicate. Create a new 3/16'' text style 28 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 587 . and click to specify the first copied text note position.

and click OK. select Project Issue Date. and enter Checked By:.37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. The label displays a default value wrapped to 2 lines. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. click Label. and enter Date. 588 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 42 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Date field. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 41 On the Options Bar.

select Checked By. and click OK. 55 Click OK twice. click Duplicate. enter 3/8" for Text Size. click . and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to specify the label location.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. Create a new 3/8'' label style 49 On the Design Bar. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. 53 In the Name dialog. 45 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Drawn By field. click Edit/New. click Label. enter 3/8" Label for Name. 47 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Checked By field. under Text. and click to specify the label location. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 589 . 50 On the Options Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Drawn By. 54 In the Type Properties dialog.

and click OK. select Sheet Number. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 590 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 57 Place the cursor at the lower-right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 59 On the Options Bar. click Center and Middle. select Label: 3/8'' Label. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click to specify the label location. select Project Number.

64 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Left and Middle. under Text.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 77 In the Select Parameter dialog. and select any labels that may need to be moved. select File Path. Create a 1/16” label style 67 On the Design Bar. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. click Modify. so that they are all aligned. 71 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 75 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the label location. select Client Name. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 73 Click OK twice. 66 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Project Name. 70 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Label. select 1/16” Label. and click OK. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. Add Project Path label 74 In the Type Selector. enter 1/16" for Text Size. 68 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 591 . and click to specify the label location. Click Modify. 78 On the Design Bar. 76 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 65 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click . enter 1/16" Label.

and labels are now complete. 11 Zoom in on the lower-right corner of the sheet. click Sheet. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The titleblock graphics. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 5 In the Open dialog. verify that default.rte is the Template file and that Project is selected under Create new. click . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise.rfa file. and then click OK.79 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training D-Size Titleblock. 592 | Chapter 17 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Other. navigate to the location of Training D-Size Titleblock. and select the titleblock. and click OK. select Training D-Size Titleblock. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Load. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. select it. 7 Click OK. enter Name for Drawn By. 9 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. text. Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar.

Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 593 . enter 2005-01. enter Office Building. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Number. 14 Click OK. enter January 1. 2005.12 On the Settings menu. For Client Name. enter In Progress. For Project Name. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. For Project Status. click Project Information. enter Jane Smith.

594 .

The lines in the layout determine the placement of the sub-elements that comprise the truss: top chord. Revit Structure then creates the structural framing elements as necessary to draw the truss. Add a roof truss by defining the span in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. bottom chord. To use the Truss tool. placing them on the layout lines specified for the selected family. This lesson comprises the following truss building exercises: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add multiple trusses to an existing project by specifying the spans Create a custom truss by modifying the brace parameters Change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to a roof Create a custom truss family using the Family Editor Create a truss using the drafting tools provided with Revit Structure Adding Trusses to a Project In this exercise. 595 . and web members. Working with Trusses In Revit Structure you add a truss to your structure by using the Truss tool.rvt. double-click Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you select the truss family type and then specify the truss start point and endpoint in the drawing. you learn how to use the truss building capabilities of Revit Structure 2009. and open Imperial\i_RST_Add_Truss. under Structural Plans. you add predefined trusses to multiple locations within an existing project. which creates the truss according to the layout and other parameters specified in whichever truss family type you select. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Truss Building 18 In this tutorial.

7 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the start point of the truss span. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 596 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 5 On the Options Bar. and draw a zoom box around the columns on the upper-left corner of the model as shown. click ■ ■ ■ . 8 Click the column at grid location A2 to select the endpoint of the truss span. Under Dimensions. 4 In the Type Selector. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. do the following: Under Structural. 9 On the View toolbar. click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Bearing Chord. enter 6' 0". click Truss.2 On the View toolbar. for Truss Height. Click OK. select Top. click .

12 Using the same method. delete the extra flange at column location A1.The truss is placed between the columns. Adding Trusses to a Project | 597 . Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. Modify the truss 10 Click the flange located at column location A2 as shown. 11 Press DELETE. Notice the extra flange at column locations A1 and A2 that will not be necessary for this span.

select Multiple. double-click Roof. 17 Click the column at grid location A1 as shown. 15 On the View toolbar. click (Copy). 598 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 14 Select the truss placed in the previous steps. 16 On the Options bar.Copy the single truss 13 In the Project Browser. under Structural Plans.

21 Enter ZF (keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit). under Structural Plans. select the remaining trusses. Copy multiple trusses to the opposite end of the structure 22 In the Project Browser. 24 While pressing CTRL.18 Click the columns at grid locations A2 and A3 to place copies of the original truss. Adding Trusses to a Project | 599 . 19 On the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. click . click (Copy). double-click Roof. click Modify. 23 Select the truss placed between grid location A1 and A2. 20 On the View toolbar.

26 Click the column at grid location A1 to select the copy start point. 27 On the Design Bar. click Truss. Add multiple trusses by defining the span in 3D view 30 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the View toolbar. 600 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click 29 Enter ZF. click Modify. 31 In the Type Selector. . and then click the column at grid location E1 to select the copy endpoint as shown. select Howe Flat Truss: Standard.

for Truss Height.32 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 35 Click the top endpoint of the column at grid location B4 to place the truss as shown. click ■ ■ ■ . select Top. do the following: Under Structural. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bearing Chord. 34 Click the column at grid location B1 as shown. Under Dimensions. Adding Trusses to a Project | 601 . enter 6' 0".

C4. 38 On the View toolbar. 37 Using the same method. . 602 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .D4. click 39 Enter ZF. and D1. add trusses between columns C1.36 Enter ZF.

Modify each truss 40 On the View toolbar. and draw a zoom box around the end of one of the trusses as 41 Select the flange at one end of the truss. click shown . Adding Trusses to a Project | 603 .

Under Diagonal Webs. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. 43 Close the Warning dialog that indicates the selected flange is pinned. click Truss. ■ ■ ■ 604 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and open Imperial\i_RST_Customize_Truss_Parameters. click Training Files. enter 90. In the next exercise. Create a new truss type for the short span 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.500. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.Short Span. for Angle. 2 In the Type Selector. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Customizing Truss Parameters In this exercise. 6 In the Name dialog. enter Howe Flat Truss . select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.42 Press DELETE. You can save the open file if you wish. a new training file is supplied. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. Click OK. for Structural Framing Type. click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. delete the flange on the opposite end of the same truss.rvt. click . and repeat for the remaining trusses. 45 Click File menu ➤ Close. you create a custom truss for both the short and long spans by modifying the truss type parameters. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.500. Under Bottom Chords. Customizing Truss Parameters on page 604. 44 Using the same method. click Duplicate. for Structural Framing Type.

Customizing Truss Parameters | 605 . 10 On the View toolbar. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss . draw a zoom box around one of the short trusses. click select the truss as shown. . 13 On the View toolbar. 11 In the Type Selector. 12 Using the same method. under 3D Views. and then NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a chord or web.Short Span. Apply the new truss type 9 In the Project Browser. .8 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. The truss changes to the new type. double-click 3D. click 14 Enter ZF. change the remaining short trusses to the new type.

select Howe Flat Truss: Standard. ■ ■ 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the View toolbar. .Roof Span. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.500. click . 20 In the Name dialog. for Structural Framing Type. and then 606 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .500. click select the truss as shown. click Truss. Under Diagonal Webs. Click OK. double-click 3D. click Duplicate. click OK. select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X. for Structural Framing Type. click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. under 3D Views. enter Howe Flat Truss . select HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS6X6X.Create a new truss type for the roof span 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Under Vertical Webs. draw a zoom box around one of the long trusses. and click OK. Apply the new truss type 23 In the Project Browser.

. 26 Using the same method. Customizing Truss Parameters | 607 . The truss changes to the new type. 25 In the Type Selector. click 28 Enter ZF. 27 On the View toolbar. change the remaining long trusses to the new type. select Howe Flat Truss: Howe Flat Truss .NOTE Check the Status Bar to make sure you are selecting the truss and not a single truss flange.Roof Span.

2 On the View toolbar. click . Select all trusses 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 608 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and then select the truss as shown. Modifying the Shape of a Truss In this exercise. double-click 3D. Modifying the Shape of a Truss on page 608.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. You can save the open file if you wish.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new training file is supplied. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change the shape of a truss profile by attaching it to an existing roof. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Change_Shape. draw a zoom box around a truss on the upper-left corner of the structure. In the next exercise.

3 Click Edit menu ➤ Select All Instances. click 5 Select the roof as shown. Modifying the Shape of a Truss | 609 . Attach the roof 4 On the Options Bar. (Attach/Detach Top Chord). All instances of the truss will be highlighted.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 610 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . 8 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close.The top chords. and draw a zoom box around a roof truss as shown. You can save the open file if you wish. click . 10 On the View Control Bar. Notice the shape of the top chord and structural webs are modified to match the roof profile. click Modify. and diagonal webs of each truss will attach itself to the shape of the roof. Creating a Custom Truss Family on page 611. vertical webs. a new training file is supplied. In the next exercise. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 9 On the View toolbar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 6 On the Design bar. View the custom truss 7 Select the roof.

Sketch web reference planes 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch 5 vertical reference planes approximately as shown. Open the truss family 1 Click File ➤ New ➤ Family.Creating a Custom Truss Family In this exercise. click Ref Plane. click the Training Files icon. and open Imperial\i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 611 . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rft located in the Imperial folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Structural_Trusses. 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Training Files. you use the Revit Structure Family Editor to create a custom truss family. click Dimension. and place dimensions to each reference plane as shown.

click Truss Top Chord. 10 Sketch the truss top chord as shown. 8 Using the same method. Sketch top and bottom chords 9 On the Design Bar. place additional vertical reference planes to complete the web pattern as shown. 612 | Chapter 18 Truss Building .7 Click the EQ symbol to apply equal constraints.

12 Sketch the truss bottom chord as shown. 14 Click the intersection of the bottom chord and the first vertical reference plane to set the start point of the first truss web as shown. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 613 . 15 Snap to the intersection of the top chord and reference plane as shown. Sketch truss webs 13 On the Design Bar. click Truss Web. Truss Bottom Chord.11 On the Design Bar.

16 Using the same method. and click OK. click Modify. 21 In the Load into Projects dialog. 19 In the Save As dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Save in. Click OK. For Save as type.rvt. navigate to a folder of your choice. 614 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Load into Projects. select Family Files (rfa). Save the new truss family 18 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 17 On the Design Bar. For File name. Load the truss into the project 20 On the Design Bar. add remaining truss webs to complete the pattern as shown. select i_RST_Truss_Custom_Family. enter Custom_Truss. You are now in the project file.

27 In the Project Browser.Place the custom truss 22 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. 24 In the Type Selector. under Structural Plans. 26 Click the column at grid location A4 to establish the endpoint of the truss as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Click the column at grid location A1 to establish the start point of the truss. 28 Repeat the same method to place additional trusses as shown. select Custom_Truss. click Truss. Creating a Custom Truss Family | 615 . under 3D Views. double-click 3D.

3 In the Choose Template dialog. you open a new project and create the top and bottom chords using the beam tool.rte. in the Imperial Templates folder. 2 In the New Project dialog. double-click Level 2. and a framing elevation. 4 In the New Project dialog. under Structural Plans. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Finally. In the next exercise.29 Click File menu ➤ Close. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools on page 616. a new training file is supplied. click OK. you add braces to form the steel truss. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Draw 2 grid lines approximately as shown. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools In this exercise. Create a new project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. create column grids. select Structural Analysis-Default. You can save the open file if you wish. click Grid. 616 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . click Browse. Create grids 5 In the Project Browser.

enter 5' 0". 16 Place a horizontal reference plane above Level 2. Place support columns 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch horizontal reference planes 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Place 2 columns on each grid line spaced approximately 70' 0" apart as shown.Add framing elevations 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 617 . under Elevations (Interior Elevation).a. and place approximately as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Structural Column.) 13 Click the Framing Elevation symbol. 9 Select each grid line. click Framing Elevation. select W-Wide Flange Column: W10 x 49. (The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only. double-click Elevation 1 . click Ref Plane. and drag the blue handles beyond each column as shown . 17 Click the dimension. 11 In the Type Selector.

22 Press ESC. Place vertical reference planes 20 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 19 Click the dimension. 18 Place a second horizontal reference plane above the first. 21 Snap to the center of the left column and draw a vertical reference plane that extends beyond the top horizontal plane as shown. 618 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . and enter 15' 0". Place multiple reference planes using the array tool 23 Select the reference plane on the left column as shown.The dimensions are displayed for reference purposes only.

and snap to the center of the right column to identify the array length. 25 Click the left vertical reference plane to identify the array start point. 26 Drag the array to the right. Place top and bottom chords 28 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. click Beam. click . 27 Enter 7 for array count. and press ENTER. The array is complete.24 On the Tools toolbar. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 619 .

make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes. click Brace. and draw a zoom box around the upper-right corner of the 620 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . When placing braces. When placing beams. 33 In the Type Selector. select 3D Snapping.30 On the Tools toolbar. select W-Wide Flange: W12 x 26. 34 Using the vertical reference planes as a guide. . create cross-braces by placing braces as shown. Place braces 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click truss as shown. Fix corner joint 35 On the View toolbar. create the top and bottom chords of the truss by placing beams as shown. 31 Using reference planes as a guide. make sure you snap to the intersections of the reference planes.

39 Select the vertical ref plane. click .36 On the Design Bar. then select the edge of the top chord as shown. Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 621 . 37 Snap to the outer surface of the brace. click Ref Plane. 38 On the Tools toolbar. and sketch a vertical ref plane as shown.

40 The edge of the top chord will align with the vertical brace as shown. double-click 3D. 622 | Chapter 18 Truss Building . View the truss 41 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

Building a Truss with Drafting Tools | 623 . 43 Save the file to a folder location of you choice. You have completed the Truss Builder tutorial.The completed truss is displayed. 42 Click File menu ➤ Save.

624 .

you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. 625 . For example. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.Creating Multiple Design Options 19 When working with a building model. In this tutorial. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. At any time in the design process. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. After you and the client agree on the final design. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs.

These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the final exercise of this lesson. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. under Option Set. 2 In the Design Options dialog. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the first exercise in this lesson. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each with multiple design options. you set up multiple design option sets. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. TIP In this exercise. With the second option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. click New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. the only available command is to create a new option set.In this particular case. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you can edit it. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. therefore. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the roof and structure systems must work together. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the second exercise. make your final design decision. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. After you create a design option. click Training Files. The client has asked you to create various options. 626 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. each is constructed for interchangeability. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option.rvt. you design each of the structural options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House.

The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 9 On the Design Bar. click Column. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. add three columns. click Edit Selected. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. In the following illustration. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Creating the Structural Design Options | 627 . click Modify. expand Views (all). You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In this case. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction.3 Select Option 1 (primary). make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. select: ■ ■ ■ . you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. By selecting Multiple. or add a dimension string between the columns. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. and the third column centered between the two. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. TIP To center the middle column. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and click Close. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 4 In the Project Browser. click 12 On the Options Bar. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 7 In the Type Selector.

When you are finished. using the same technique. click . A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 628 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. Because of the size of the columns.

You can do this manually or use the Copy command. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. In it. The first click specifies the beam start point. select Round Bar : 2". Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Beam. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. you add the beams that span the columns. 20 On the tab of the Design Bar. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Next. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 19 In the Project Browser. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Use the following illustration as a guide. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 629 . double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns.

30 On the View toolbar. 630 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns. 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and click the center point.25 On the Edit toolbar. click . zoom into the left column. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and select the center of the column to add a copy. click 26 On the Options Bar.

44 Select the option set Roofing and. and click OK. under Option. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. not a new option set. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. 36 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. click New. 45 Under Roofing. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Rename. and click OK. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. under Option Set.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). enter Beam for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Brackets for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog. click New. and click OK. enter Structure for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. Creating the Structural Design Options | 631 . and click OK. 40 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. select Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog. name the option Louvers.

52 Click Close. select Beam. Under Now Editing. 48 Under Option. under Structure. select Edit Selected. double-click ROOF TERRACE. name the option Sunscreen. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. click Rename. 50 In the Design Options dialog. under Floor Plans. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 632 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .47 Under Roofing. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 53 In the Project Browser. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. you create the second design option. and click OK. 51 Under Edit. it will resemble the following illustration. When finished. select Option 2. This allows you to more easily manage the project.

select Roof Beam. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Creating the Structural Design Options | 633 . 58 On the Tools menu.

The first click sets the move start point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 62 Select the beam and. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .60 After aligning the beam. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam.

click . Notice that even before you close the dialog. click Finish Editing. 69 Click Close. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.rvt.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 67 On the Tools menu. i_Urban_House-in progress. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click Save As. name the file. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. 66 On the View toolbar. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 70 On the File menu. you need this file in its current state. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click Save. which is visible by default. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. Creating the Structural Design Options | 635 .

10 Referring to the following illustration. you set up multiple design option sets. Sunscreen. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. expand Views (all). and double-click TOP OF CORE. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. select Rafter 2 x 10. Under Now Editing. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. each with multiple design options to pick from. The first option. under Roofing. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. In the next exercise. click Edit Selected. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 2 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. The second roofing system. a Louver system. select Louvers (primary). You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. do so now. you design each of the roofing options.In this exercise. click Component. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. the other for beams. open it now. 4 Under Edit. If you need to add dimensions. 8 In the Type Selector. expand Floor Plans.rvt. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. With the second option. 6 In the Project Browser. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. 5 Click Close. delete them after the rafter is in place. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets.

click Array. enter 38' 6" for Length. Enter 5 for Number. 16 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 637 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Constrain. click . click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. Select 2nd for Move To. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 15 On the Edit menu. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam.

you can enter 3 3. The space separates feet and inches. enter 3' 3". Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. TIP When entering a dimension value. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. rather than entering 3' 3". For example. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options .18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. you do not need to type the foot and inch markers.

27 For the array starting point. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 26 On the Options Bar. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and click OK. when the listening dimension displays. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move To. click the Edit menu. select Louver 2 x 6. 22 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click Modify. click . and press Enter. 20 In the Type Selector. Enter 34 for Number. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. click Component. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and. and click Array. and select the louver you just placed. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 1’. under Other. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 639 . 25 With the louver still selected.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. The louver roof system is complete.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 29 On the View toolbar. under Edit. click . The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 30 On the Tools menu.

Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. and double-click West. Therefore. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. and the third point defines the arc. select Sunscreen. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The first two points define the ends of the line. 33 Under Editing. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. and then click Close. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. In this case. 39 On the Design Bar. then you can modify it through the dimension. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. expand Elevations. under Roofing. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 641 . 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. the top of the next column on the right. 34 In the Project Browser. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Properties. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and click OK. You will fix this in a later step. 40 On the Options Bar. click Edit Selected. 43 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 41 Select the top of the left column. Click OK.

click Finish Sketch. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. click Trim/Extend.44 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click Close. 50 On the Tools menu. Sunscreen. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. The second roofing system. In this exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 On the Design Bar. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click . 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 46 On the Tools menu. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. under Edit. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 49 On the View toolbar. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. then the center arc. The first option. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. The louver roof system is complete. click Save. a Louver system. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. 51 In the Design Options dialog. Under Constraints. 45 Click OK. 52 On the File menu. click Finish Editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. you need this file in its current state. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. you designed each of the roofing options. Select the right arc.

tertiary. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 On the View menu. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Secondary Option. do so now. and click Rename. After exploring the combinations. and click Duplicate. secondary. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under 3D Views. expand 3D Views. and last options.Managing Design Options In this exercise. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. you select a design. enter Primary Option. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 5 Right-click each of the copies. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. make it part of the building model. under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under Views (all). under Views (all). double-click Primary Option. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and delete the discarded design options. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 643 . Notice that both option sets are set to automatic.

and click OK. click the Design Options tab. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 15 On the View menu. 19 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option. under Views (all). 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. click the Design Options tab. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under 3D Views.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. under Views (all).

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. An alert is displayed. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. click Yes. select Beam. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 25 Select Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. 29 Select Roofing. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options.At this point. 24 Under Option. 27 In the alert dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. This was the client choice for structural. click Yes. click Delete. double-click Primary Option. since you no longer need them. Managing Design Options | 645 . select Make Primary. click Accept Primary. 26 Under Option Set. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 22 On the Tools menu. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 31 In the alert dialog. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. In this case. 30 Under Option Set. but should be accepted as part of the building model. the beam option becomes part of the model. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. In your design options. Because the client has selected the design option. click Close. The set is deleted. 23 In the Design Options dialog.

and deleted the discarded design options. 35 On the File menu. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. you selected a design. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Multiple Design Options . After exploring the combinations. made it part of the building model. click Save. In this exercise.

you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. In the final lesson. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency. 647 . A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. and manage the links throughout the project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. modify their visibility. In this tutorial. performance. Comparison of alternatives on a site. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In these situations. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project.

you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Structure 2009 to automatically place it.Linking Building Models In this lesson. 648 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. modify their visibility. NOTE The center of a Revit Structure model is the center of the model geometry.Center to Center: Revit Structure places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. and the other is a townhouse. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. One building model is a condominium.

rvt. and save the file there. in the Model Linking folder that you created. select the three files. and click Properties. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 665. click Open. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. click Close. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. ■ ■ Manual . Otherwise. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. click Save As. 2 On the File menu. right-click. Manual . and open Common\c_Site. c_Condo_Complex. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 649 . you can do so. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. click Open.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. and click OK.■ Auto . 5 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. All three files now reside. this option will place the link at a predefined location. 8 Clear Read-only. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . with write permission. this system is not exposed to the user. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Training Files.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. RELATED See the lesson. Select c_Site. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 4 On the File menu. c_Townhouse. Auto . NOTE Revit Structure projects have an internal coordinate system. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Structure Files. however.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Structure model. This option is grayed out. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.

and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Project Browser. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. Notice the blue detail lines.Origin to Origin. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 650 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 11 On the File menu. select Auto .■ Click Open. For Positioning. expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. expand Views (all). 13 Click Open.

The first click specifies the move start point. click (Move). After you select it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The Move command requires two clicks.Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. After you specify the location to move to. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The linked model moves as one object. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 651 . The second click specifies the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector.

and select c_Townhouse. For Positioning. select Auto . 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.18 On the View menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 652 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Origin to Origin. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.

To rotate an object. and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 653 . and then click to specify the end of the rotation. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. when the vertical line displays. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. click (Rotate). In this case.23 On the Edit toolbar. you first specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 654 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move).

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. click (Copy). 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point. 30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 655 .The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. under Identity data. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and click OK. 37 On the View toolbar. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. enter Townhouse A. 32 On the Edit menu. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click . if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. click (Default 3D View). click Rotate. for Name. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. 656 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B.

you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site.38 On the File menu. When you originally linked the files. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click and hold Orbit. After linking the files. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. If you have not completed the previous exercise. do so before continuing. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. In this exercise. you linked two separate Revit Structure 2009 models into a site model. they were placed too low within the site topography. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 657 . In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. 2 On the SteeringWheels.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. when it highlights. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.rvt. and click to select the line. and click to select it. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and click OK. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. In this case.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. expand Elevations. 658 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. and double-click South. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. you first select the plane you want to align to. In the steps that follow. under Views (all). press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. To do this. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. Click the Revit Links tab. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the plane that you want to align. When using the Align command. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 3 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. click (Align).

Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. This would over-constrain the model. 9 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.

11 Return to the South elevation view. Both townhouses should be at the proper level.

12 On the View toolbar, click 13 On the View toolbar, click

(Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

14 On the SteeringWheels, click and hold Orbit, and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

15 On the File menu, click Save.

Repositioning Linked Building Models | 659

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see, each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. In the next exercise, you modify how the linked files display within the host project.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
In this exercise, you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project file within another project, you can independently control the visibility settings, detail level, display settings, and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South. 2 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 4 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. When you link a file, the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt, click By Host View. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. If the Basics page is set to Custom, then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View, By linked view, or Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 8 For Annotation Categories, select <Custom>. 9 Under Visibility, scroll down and clear Levels. 10 Click OK. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.

NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

660 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps, clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.rvt.

Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 14 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility, expand c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project, and click OK. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. With linked files, you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Using the Custom option, you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone.

Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click the Revit Links tab. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt, under Display Settings, click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, on the Basics tab, select Custom. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 23 In the Model categories list, select <Custom>. By default, the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. By selecting custom under Model Categories, you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. You can click the value for Detail Level, and then set the detail level to coarse, medium, or fine. In this case, no detail level changes are required. 24 Click OK.

Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 661

Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range, phase, and phase filter of a specific link. 25 On the Revit Links tab, under Visibility, select c_Townhouse.rvt. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.

26 Under Display Settings, click Custom for the Townhouse link. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. By default, the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. In most cases, this is preferable. However, there are situations, on a sloped site for instance, where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. In this case, the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. 28 Select By linked view for View range. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. In this case, the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed, with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. With the Show All filter applied, all new, existing, demolished, and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. All other components are grayed out. 29 Click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog, click OK. 31 On the File menu, click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In the next exercise, you manage the linked files.

Managing Linked Building Models
In this exercise, you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. After you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project, a connection to the linked project continues to exist. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified, those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened.

662 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise, do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 2 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab. Notice the Loaded, Locations Not Saved, and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. In a shared coordinate environment, any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. As links are moved to new locations in the host project, you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type, notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The default path type is Relative. In general, you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory, the link is maintained. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location, the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 4 Under Linked File, select c_Condo_Complex.rvt. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 5 Click Unload. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.

Managing Linked Building Models | 663

TIP In the Manage Links dialog, you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases, you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. In these cases, you should consider the following:

Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model, you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. In the Import/Link RVT dialog, click the arrow next to the Open button, and select Specify. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files, you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. To do this, go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects, the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated, you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. When you initially place the link, both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. However, link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In general, you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset.

TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file, it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. If you choose not to open that workset, the link is not loaded. 8 In the Project Browser, expand Revit Links, right-click c_Condo_Complex.rvt, and click Reload. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location.

9 On the File menu, click Save As.

664 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

10 In the Save As dialog, navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise, name the file Site_Project, and save it as an RVT file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson, Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models, it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In this exercise, you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In the next lesson, you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now, leave the project file open in its current view.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
In this lesson, you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking, you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you share coordinates between projects, you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. In essence, you are establishing a shared origin point. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When Revit project views are exported to DWG, project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous lesson, do so before continuing.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
In this exercise, you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. The host file consists primarily of site components. When you link a Revit Structure 2009 project into another project (the host project), you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models, the host project coordinates are used. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 665

When you are working in the host project, you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. In this case, the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson, Linking Building Models on page 648, and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson, do so before continuing. If you have closed the project, open it before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

2 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. As indicated in the Status Bar, you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area, click the Condo Complex. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project.

666 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, select Location 1, and click OK. On the Status Bar, notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Structure is waiting for you to select another link. 5 On the Design Bar, click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
When a Revit Structure 2009 model is linked into a host project, it is placed at a specific location. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host, this location is not saved outside of the host project. However, if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project, then the location becomes saved in the linked file. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location, but can have multiple additional locations. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. These three locations can be named Lot A, Lot B, and Lot C. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise, you specify and save the two townhouse locations, even though both models originate from one linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1, move the cursor over the left townhouse and, when the edges highlight, click to select it.

2 On the Options Bar, click

.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 667

3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 4 Under Value, click Not Shared for Shared Location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models, a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. This is a one-time operation. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog:
■ ■

Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location, click Change.

6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Rename. 7 In the Rename dialog, enter Lot A for New, and click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog, click Reconcile. 10 In the Element Properties dialog, notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A, and click OK. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location, changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. When constraining a link to a location, you have only two choices:
■ ■

Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. Record the current position as a location. .

12 On the Options Bar, click

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Instance Parameters, click Not Shared for Shared Location. In the Choose Location dialog, notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. 14 In the Choose Location dialog, select Move instance to. Notice the OK button is not active. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You created the Lot A location in previous steps, and the left townhouse resides at that location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog, select the second option, Record current position as. Notice the OK button is still not active. Because Lot A is currently in use, you cannot redefine its location. 16 Click Change. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate, enter Lot B for Name, and click OK. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, make sure Lot B is selected, and click OK. 19 In the Select Location dialog, click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. Save locations 21 On the File menu, click Manage Links. 22 In the Manage Links dialog, click the Revit tab, and then select the townhouse project.

668 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

23 Click Save Locations. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. When you create a location, it is not automatically saved within the linked file. To explicitly save a location, you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files, you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog, notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 26 Click OK. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button, a warning displays. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location, ignore the warning, or cancel the action. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you relocate a project, the active location position is moved, although it may appear that the linked files are moving. By relocating a project, you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Tools menu, click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. This is a two-click process. The first click specifies the move start point. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol.

32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin.

Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 669

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up, and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin.

33 On the Edit menu, click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 34 On the File menu, click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog, select Save, and click OK. 36 On the File menu, click Close. NOTE In the following exercise, you work in one of the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Structure. In this exercise, you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Working with a Linked Building Model
After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared, the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. When opening the linked file, you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Also, if other models were linked into the same host, you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. In this exercise, you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Training File

On the File menu, click Open.

670 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click 1st Floor. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.rvt file. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. In addition, the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.rvt file. 2 On the File menu, click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning, select Auto - By Shared Coordinates. Click Open.

Because this building model only has one named location, it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. The current active location is Lot A. Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 6 Select Lot B, and click Make Current. 7 Click OK. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

Working with a Linked Building Model | 671

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson, you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise, you worked within a project that is linked within another project. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. In the next exercise, you manage the shared locations.

Managing Shared Locations
The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise, you create a new location, orient a view to true north, and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercises, do so before continuing. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu, click Manage Place and Locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click Duplicate. 3 In the Name dialog, enter Lot C, and click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog, click OK. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. In the host file, you can select Lot C if necessary. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu, click View Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select True North for Orientation, and click OK. 7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

672 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu, click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar, notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. 10 On the File menu, click Close. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise, you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files
In this exercise, you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the exercise, do so before continuing. Training File
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Select Site_Project.rvt and click Open.

Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.

Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 673

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Doors, and click OK. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields, select Count, and click Add. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order:
■ ■ ■

Family and Type Comments Cost

7 Select Include elements in linked files.

674 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates

12 Select Grand totals. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Close. and click Properties. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 675 . In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. In this exercise. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. You have completed this tutorial. right-click Door Schedule. clear Itemize every instance. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. select Family and Type for Sort by.8 Click OK. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. under Other. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 14 On the File menu. click Save. 13 On the File menu. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type.

676 .

In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phase 1 (south): Includes new steelwork and footings for the existing building. Using Phasing In this lesson. and a non load-bearing brick panel wall for a new building to be constructed north of the galleria. a floor slab. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you renovate a building to convert it to a shopping mall. You then create schedules for the phased steelwork and 3-dimensional views of the phased construction and place them on a drawing sheet for a specific phase. as well as a covered walkway. braces and footings) to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You create new phases. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. complete with schedules. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. footings. and then add new building model elements. You create new phases. you work with a building information model that requires renovation. For the client.Project Phasing 21 In any project. Also includes demolition of all internal walls for the existing building. beams. You create and manage 3 project phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. assign new building model elements such as steelwork (columns. ■ ■ 677 . You customize the display of phased work to highlight demolition work. and create plan views for each phase. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phase 2 (north): Includes new steelwork. the galleria. In this tutorial. demolish existing construction. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. assigning building elements to the appropriate phase: ■ Existing: Includes the original brick-clad building with structural walls and non load-bearing internal partitions.

Existing phase Phase 1 (south) 678 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing .

Phase 2 (north) After you add phases to the project. you create structural schedules for a specific phase of the project. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create new phase-specific views. and modify graphic overrides to highlight demolition work. Phasing Your Model | 679 . use phase filters to control what displays in each phase. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules and 2 views of the building model. The default structural project template has 2 phases: Existing and New Construction. you begin with all the building elements drawn as new construction. You create new phases for the project timeline. The finished sheet Phasing Your Model In this exercise. After you assign building elements to phases.

This phase assignment is controlled by a Phase setting within the view properties. The Show All filter means that all building model elements (new. TIP Available phases and view phase settings can be changed in a project template so they are available for each new project. 4 Click Cancel. When you create a new structural project. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. notice that the Phase Created value is New Construction. A phase view can show work in the current phase and work from previous phases in the project timeline. In the Element Properties dialog. existing. They can also be added or edited in an existing project at any time. Demolition work is represented by a black dashed line. Any new elements that you add to this view are assigned the New Construction phase value. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default.rvt. or temporary) are visible in this phase. expand Floor Plans. You can also use the Demolition tool to select building elements for demolition. and double-click Floor. demo. 6 On the Options Bar. By default. 2 phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. and the Phase Demolished value is None. click . then new building elements are assigned to Phase 1. As you add new elements to the building model. while previous phase linework is displayed as gray. expand Views (all). under Phasing. if a view is assigned to a Phase 1 setting.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Every building element has a Phase Created and a Phase Demolished value so you can assign a creation and a demolition phase to new work. For example. click Training Files. These values let you assign creation and demolition phases in a timeline. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. the current phase linework is displayed as black. Verify the current phase is New Construction 1 In the Project Browser. 680 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and open Common\c_STR_Project_Phasing.

All of the building elements in the project are currently assigned to Phase 1 (south). click the New Construction field. and click OK. expand 3D Views. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You do not see a change in the graphics because all the building elements are new to Phase 1 (south). so Phase 1 and Phase 2 occur after the Existing phase. With the phase Filter set to Show New. you will see a visual confirmation of the change as the building elements disappear from the view. which means that work assigned to Phase 1 (south). and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ Existing: Existing building Phase 1 (south): Existing building with new steelwork and demolished walls Phase 2 (north): New building with steelwork and exterior panel wall 14 Click OK. on the Project Phases tab. The phases are on a timeline with later phases lower on the list. 11 Enter Phase 1 (south). click After. 12 Under Insert. demo. and enter Phase 2 (north) under Name. and double-click 3D. and Phase 2 (north). 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. There are now 3 phases in your project: Existing. is visible in this view. existing earlier phases.7 Click Cancel. 10 In the Phasing dialog. Add and edit phases 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. click Modify to clear the command. Assign selected building elements to the Existing phase 15 In the Project Browser. as you change selected building elements to the existing phase. 18 Select Show New for Phase Filter. scroll down the list of Instance Parameters until you see the Phasing heading. 13 Click in the Description fields for each phase. All building objects that were assigned to New Construction are now assigned to Phase 1 (south) because you changed the phase name. Phasing Your Model | 681 . Phase 1 (south). The Phase value is Phase 1 (south) and the Phase filter is Show All. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. or temporary work (created and demolished in same phase). Now you are seeing only work that is new to Phase 1 (south) of the project.

click Hide/Isolate. and click Hide Object. 682 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . and click Select All Instances. right-click one of the rectangular footings. The footings are hidden and cannot be selected. 22 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 20 In the drawing area.19 Click the ViewCube to adjust your view as shown. 21 On the View Control Bar.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. The building elements that you assigned to the Existing phase are no longer displayed in the drawing. under Phasing. 24 On the Options Bar. Only elements new to Phase 1 (south) are displayed. click . click . 25 In the Filter dialog. 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. 32 Click OK. are selected and are displayed in red. walls. The continuous footing foundations. This filters out the steelwork. click Hide/Isolate. 29 On the View Control Bar. select Show All for Phase Filter. and previously you hid the rectangular footings to make sure they couldn’t be selected.23 Use a crossing window to select the existing building. select Existing for Phase Created. under Phasing. 26 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. which are the building elements that comprise the existing building. 30 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. and click Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click OK. clear Structural Columns and Structural Framing. Phasing Your Model | 683 . and openings.

and Phase 2 (north) project phases. click . 35 On the Options Bar. You see work for Phase 1 (south) and the existing phases. You do not see future phases such as Phase 2 (north). Because this is a renovation project. the building is displayed as shown. All of the structural elements are still assigned to Phase 1 (south). 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. Because the active phase is Phase 1 (south) and the phase filter is set to Show All. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and the footings north of the galleria. the walls. the slab. After you create the views. you modify phase and phase filter properties 684 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 34 Use a selection window to select the structural elements. You have reassigned building elements to 3 phases. and click OK.Now you can see the Existing phase displayed with gray linework in the view. select Phase 2 (north) for Phase Created. it requires separate plan views for the Existing. 37 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. Phase 1 (south) with demolition.

44 Repeat the process to create a view named Phase 2 (north) Manage the phases for a view 45 In the Project Browser. new. Because this is a phase-specific view. 50 In the View Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. select Existing for Phase. and click Rename. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of Existing. enter Existing. The line style of the new work. under Floor Plans. 43 In the Rename View dialog. Create phase-specific plan views 38 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click . right-click Floor. You now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and for Phase 1. In a phase such as Phase 1. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. demo. Because of this time relationship. 49 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 42 In the Project Browser. 46 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter Phase 1 (south). in phase 1. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. and click Duplicate. shows as black. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. right-click Existing. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. under Phasing. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. and click OK. and temporary) are shown in the same timeline. 48 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Rename View dialog. under Phasing. Phasing Your Model | 685 . double-click Existing. 40 Click No. under Floor Plans.to determine which phase is shown and which building elements (existing. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. select Phase 1 (south) for the Phase value. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double click Phase 1 (south). Demolish the interior walls 51 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. it might be desirable to show previous phases or demolition. which will include planned demolition. and click OK.

55 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Phase 2 (north). The default phase filters are displayed. Demo Red. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 58 In the Phasing dialog. however. 60 Under Filter Name. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements. 59 In the Phasing dialog.52 Referring to the walls displayed as dashed lines in the following illustration. and enter Demo Red. 61 For the Filter Name. it is displayed as a dashed line. Create a custom phase filter 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Graphic overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status: existing. select Overridden. View graphic overrides 62 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override to highlight the demolished walls in red. new or temporary. When you demolish the host. and Temporary. Demolished. click New. you demolish all elements hosted by it. In this case. As you click each wall. click Filter 1. New. Notice that the openings display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. under Demolished. 63 Click on the Demolished line color and change it from black to red. demo. select Phase 2 (north) for the Phase value. 686 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . Because the Phase value is Phase 1 (south) the walls are demolished in this phase. and select Show All for Phase Filter. That is because the openings are wall-hosted elements. click the Phase Filters tab. under Floor Plans. 64 Click OK twice. Existing. select the interior walls one at a time. 53 In the Project Browser. 56 Click OK. under Phasing. The line style of the current phase is displayed as black and previous phases are displayed as gray.

74 In the Element Properties dialog. Because you changed the override. Create phase-specific 3D views 69 In the Project Browser. the demolished walls are displayed as red. The override settings for Show All and Demo Red are the same. Phase 2 (north). 70 Right-click on each of the copies. 81 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click OK. double-click Existing. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 66 To assign as specific phase filter to a view. select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. and click OK. select Demo Red for Phase Filter to show work that is demolished with the red line color from the graphic overrides. which will show both architectural and structural building elements. and Show All for Phase Filter. under 3D Views. Because of this time relationship. Phase 1 (south) occurs after existing construction. The line style of the walls and openings are displayed as black. 83 Select Coordination for Discipline. 82 In the Element Properties dialog. Phase 1 (south). under 3D Views. Phasing Your Model | 687 . under 3D Views. in phase 1. 75 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 79 In the Project Browser. This displays both architectural and structural building elements. You can see the earlier existing phase because the phase filter is set to Show All. under Graphics. Do this 3 times so you have 3 copies. 80 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. select Shading for Model Graphics Style. 78 Click OK. select Existing for the Phase value. 77 Select Coordination for Discipline. The line style of the new work. double-click Phase 1 (south). double-click Phase 1 (south). a graphic override is used to make “older” existing elements use the gray line style. under Phasing. right-click 3D and click Duplicate. under Phasing. and the Show All phase filter includes the override for demolition. Manage the phases for the 3D views 72 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. 71 Name the views Existing.Apply the Demo Red graphic overrides to a view 65 Under Floor Plans. 76 Under Graphics. shows as black. 73 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Rename.

you created a building model with 3 distinct phases and created 3 plan views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.84 Click OK. You created a custom phase filter with graphic overrides to show demolition work in red. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules In this exercise. You create a new sheet on which you place the schedules. In this exercise. 86 If you wish to save this file. You finished the exercise by creating 3d phased views suitable for a client presentation.84 for the Phase 2 (north) view. assigning Phase 2 (north) as the Phase. and footing schedules for a single phase of a project. as well as 2 views of the building model. The finished sheet 688 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . you create column. framing. 85 Repeat steps 81 . you can do so at this time or you can continue in this file for the next exercise.

Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 689 . Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Click OK. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Structural Columns. click the Fields tab. select the following fields. click Training Files. Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities.Phase 1 for Name. select Structural Framing. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. Select Grand totals. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Length TIP Press and hold CTRL to make multiple selections under Available Fields. Create a structural framing schedule for Phase 1 (south) 6 On the Design Bar. You can drag a column grid line to adjust the width of a column. Enter Columns . click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enter Framing . 5 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create a structural column schedule for Phase 1 (south) 1 On the View tab of the Design bar.Phase 1 for Name. Click OK. and open Imperial\i_STR_Project_Phasing_Schedules. Clear Itemize every instance. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Select Length for Then by. 4 Under Available Fields.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the New Schedule dialog.

8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. Clear Itemize every instance. 14 Under Available Fields. enter Phase 1 . select the following fields. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 19 In the Sheet Title dialog. Enter Footings . and do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort By. click OK. select Structural Foundations. Use the following illustration as a guide as you complete the steps to create your sheet. Create a sheet and then add views and schedules 16 In the Project Browser. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 15 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select the following fields. Click OK. 690 | Chapter 21 Project Phasing . 13 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Phase 1 (south) for Phase. click the Fields tab.Structural for Name. expand Sheets (all). and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ Count Family and Type 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 18 In the Project Browser. Click OK. you drag the schedules and project views onto the sheet. Select Grand totals. right-click Sheets (all). click the Fields tab.Phase 1 for Name. Clear Itemize every instance. 17 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Select Grand totals. Next. and click New Sheet. right-click the new sheet. Create a footings schedule for Phase 1 (south) 11 On the Design bar. 9 Under Available Fields. Click OK. and click Rename. click Schedule/Quantities 12 In the New Schedule dialog.

expand Floor Plans. 22 Expand Schedules. In this exercise. and click to place it. drag each of the 3 schedules onto the sheet. you created 3 custom structural schedules for a specific project phase and placed them on a sheet. Creating Phase-Specific Structural Schedules | 691 . select each schedule one at a time. and click to place them. and move the column controls to adjust column width. and drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet. 23 On the sheet. and click to place it. drag Phase 1 (south) onto the sheet.20 In the Project Browser. 21 Under 3D views.

692 .

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting. Daytime rendering of the pool house 693 . Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 22 In this tutorial. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model. you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Structure 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model.

Nighttime rendering of the pool house You learn to create and apply materials to the building model. and then render a final exterior view. After you create the perspective view. you specify options that define the model environment. you: ■ ■ ■ change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. add trees to the building site. In this exercise. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. the pad. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. When you complete these changes. 694 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Pool_House. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 695 .rvt. View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

The Wood . so you can change the render appearance for the material. 696 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and on the Options Bar. (Element You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Structure. 7 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. The design calls for the use of a dark stained. for Materials. verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood . click Properties). click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction. select Wood .Teak.3 In the drawing area. Solid material is currently a light stained teak. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Materials dialog. 10 On the Render Appearance tab. Solid.Teak. Solid. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. satin-finished teak.Teak. click Replace. select the wooden screen wall.

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. click (Element Properties). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Under Construction. and click Update Preview.Cast-in-Place Concrete. select Broom Straight. which is using a default material. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area. click Modify. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 697 . click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss. select Satin Varnish. and click . and on the Options Bar. You do not want the medium gloss finish. and click OK. and click OK. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog. 18 In the Materials dialog. and review the material patterns. 22 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Render Appearance tab. 20 Click the Graphics tab. click Edit. for the Structure [1] Material value. select Concrete . for Finish. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish. The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category. for Structure. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 13 Click Update Preview. for Finish. select the pad. 21 Click OK 4 times. click <By Category>. but it is the closest material to what you want. click Edit/New. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish.

698 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog. enter Metal . and click OK. 30 In the Render Appearance Library. By selecting this option. and click OK.Black. and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall.Aluminum. click Aluminum Anodized Black. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog.Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions. for Name. 24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. review the material appearance (color and pattern). 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog. 25 In the Materials dialog. 27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. click Replace. and click OK. select Metal . click (Duplicate). the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. Anodized . You create a black anodized aluminum material.Aluminum. 29 On the Render Appearance tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar. select Region. select Metal . (Show Rendering Dialog).32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 699 . 38 At the top of the Rendering dialog.Black. 36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Curtain Wall Mullions. and click 34 In the Materials dialog.Aluminum. . click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog. 35 Click OK twice. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. Anodized . select the Material value.

and pad). It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image. mullions.40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen. NOTE The smaller the region. the faster the image renders. 700 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

the longer the rendering process will take. The higher the quality. Refer to the Revit Structure Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Sun. click Show the model. under Display. ■ ■ 43 Click Render. and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog: ■ Under Quality. Adding Trees to the Site on page 701.rvt. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. on the Rendering dialog. select Sunlight from top left. for Scheme. select Medium. providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 47 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 To display the building model. you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project. Adding Trees to the Site | 701 . Several quality settings are available. select Exterior: Sun only. after the rendering process completes. for Setting. The Rendering Progress dialog displays. Under Lighting.

Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. imperial components and units are used in this lesson. expand Views (all). when you render an exterior view of the model. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps. NOTE For simplicity. but any type and size can be used.rvt. 702 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .In a later exercise. 2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway. and double-click Site. the RPC model is used in the rendering. expand Floor Plans.

Adding Trees to the Site | 703 . NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project. click Site Component. similar to the locations shown. as shown. and place 2 trees in the project.3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. near the walkway. they can be loaded from the Content Library.Deciduous : Red Maple . 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio.) 6 In the Type Selector. and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector. select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. select RPC Tree . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. (Exact placement is not important. See Loading Families in the Revit Structure 2009 Online Help.30'. right-click in the Design Bar.

Deciduous : Scarlet Oak . for New. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. 704 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .18'. Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Rename.Deciduous : Honey Locust .7 In the Type Selector. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees. select RPC Tree . click (Element Properties). select RPC Tree .25'. 11 In the Rename dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree. enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.42'. enter Honey Locust .

Creating a Perspective View on page 705. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View | 705 . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera.rvt. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 706 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. The perspective view displays. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and select the crop boundary. With the camera shown.3 Zoom out. and click Show Camera. as shown. Depending on camera placement. right-click 3D View 1. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. as necessary. Creating a Perspective View | 707 . The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. in the Project Browser. If the camera is not shown in the view. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and adjust the field of vision. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard.

7 In the Rename View dialog.Day to open the view. 708 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .6 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day. enter Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 10 Save the file. under 3D Views. and click OK. double-click Exterior . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 709. and click Rename.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 709 . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and render a daytime view of the exterior. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. double-click Exterior . you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.Day. You then duplicate the view. under 3D Views.rvt. modify render settings.

710 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. 6 Click OK twice. and click Render. enter Spring Equinox . export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. under Lighting. select Spring Equinox. You adjust cloud settings as required. select Edit/New. see Orienting to True North for Solar Studies. 3pm.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. under Background. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 5 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. 8 Under Quality. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. for Setting. for New. select Sky: Cloudy. In this case. for Sun. NOTE If a background image is required. 3 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Santa Monica. You create a location and time for the rendering.

For Files of type. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Export. click Desktop.9 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Structure session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 711 . select Portable Network Graphics (*. Click Save.

120V to the Pool Lights group. on the View Control Bar.Night. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. click OK. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. click New. add 30 :Sconce Light .Night. click Render.Flat Round : 60W . under Lighting. for Scheme. select the first light. and click OK.120V.Flat Round : 60W . 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. dialog. under 3D Views.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .120V through 14 :Sconce Light . right-click Exterior . enter Pool Lights.Day. under Ungrouped Lights. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. press and hold SHIFT. under Group Options. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . select Exterior: Artificial only. and select the last light. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. 16 With the Exterior . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog.Night view open. 22 Using the same method. for Name. and click OK. 25 Using the same method. under Ungrouped Lights. under Group Options. and click OK. you duplicate the view and change the settings.Flat Round : 60W . and click Artificial Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. for Name. click Dialog). 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Flat Round : 60W . verify that Pool Lights is selected. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .Exterior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Move to Group. 712 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . To select a sequential list.Day view to Exterior . enter Pool House Lights. click New. 19 In the New Light Group dialog.

Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Structure session.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. you change the brightness of the exposure. under Image. In this example. for Exposure Value. 30 In the Rendering dialog. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. and click OK. click Adjust Exposure. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Rendering an Interior View on page 713. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. 32 Save the file. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. After the image is rendered. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. enter 4. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View | 713 .

Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings. 714 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. render the views.rvt. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.

and place the component inside the pool house. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. 5 On the Design Bar. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. Adding RPC People | 715 . ■ (Rotate). click Component. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. and on the Edit toolbar. 4 In the Type Selector. Exact placement is not important.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Modify.

select Cast Reflections. click Modify. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. under Parameters. click (Element Properties). click Edit. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Save the file. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 12 Click OK 3 times. for Render Appearance Properties. click Edit/New. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. 716 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. you can enable this option. In order to see the figure’s reflection. By default.

rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 717 . c_Pool_House_in_progress. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 717. click Camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.

5 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. under Extents. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window.The perspective view displays. select Section Box. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 718 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 4 In the Project Browser.

11 In the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 8 In the Project Browser. double-click South. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click Level 1. in addition to the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 719 . select the section box. under Floor Plans.

right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. select the section box. 14 In the 3D view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. 720 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 721. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and render the interior view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass.15 Maximize the 3D view. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 721 . To create a daytime view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior.

5 Click Artificial Lights. 7 Under Quality. under 3D Views. You can specify a lower quality. click Render. 722 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Setting.rvt. and click OK. and click Rename. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. under Lighting. select Draft. enter Interior . clear Pool Lights. for Scheme.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. select Interior: Artificial only. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. After these settings are established. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.Night. you turn them off for this scene. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 In the Rendering dialog.

(Show Rendering Dialog). The preset schemes are read-only. select Spring Equinox .9 Close the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. select Edit. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. By default they are turned off. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You create a view for the interior during the day. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. select Curtain Walls. and click OK. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.Day. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 3pm.Santa Monica. you must create a custom setting. see the Revit Structure Online Help. For more information on daylight portals. In this case. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. For sunlit interiors. select Region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Scheme. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 13 In the Rendering dialog. click 14 For Setting. in order to turn on daylight portals. for Sun. the daylight portals can be turned on. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. and click Render.Night. Creating the Interior Rendering | 723 . select Interior: Sun only. right-click Interior . 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Daylight Portal Options.

click Show the model. In the next steps. select the column on the right. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. and on the Options Bar.18 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK. enter 1. under Image. and close the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. For Saturation. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. 20 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. (Element 724 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Properties). enter 10.

add a bump map to create texture. select Wood. Creating the Interior Rendering | 725 . 24 In the Materials dialog. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column.22 In the Element Properties dialog. click Settings menu ➤ Materials.6. 30 In the drawing area. select Based on wood grain. and on the Options Bar. for Setting. 32 In the Rendering dialog. For Rotate. For Bump. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click Render. click OK. select High. 29 In the Rendering dialog. You change the varnish setting. enter 90. clear Region. As size and DPI are increased. 28 In the Rendering dialog. For Width. the render time increases significantly. select Printer. 26 Click Update Preview. under Output Settings. Click OK. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select Unfinished. for Resolution. enter 5''. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. For Amount. select Scale (locked proportions). you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click OK. 23 With the column still selected.

but you can also define it in a 3D. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.The rendered image displays. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. The walkthrough path is a spline. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. elevation. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. or section view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Usually. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Structure 2009. independent of the Revit Structure software. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. In a plan view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 726 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model.

you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected. and change unit formats as desired. and click the tab in the context menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 727 . Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 1st Floor. click Settings ➤ Project Units. If you prefer to use metric values.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. click Training Files. proceeds through the dining room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 728 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 12 On the View menu. 17 Click . click the dimensions for Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click Edit Walkthrough. 14 Click . on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 9''. for Frame. enter 16''. select the crop boundary. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. If it is not. and select the crop boundary. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 1. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. and for Height. and click OK. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 729 . for Width. 11 Under Change. verify that Field of view is selected. and click OK.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. press ESC. click Edit Walkthrough. click (Element Properties). The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time.The walkthrough plays. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 730. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. proceed to the next exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 730 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Extents. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. clear Far Clip Active. double-click 1st Floor. under Floor Plans. and click OK.rvt.

and drag it to the location shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position. 6 On the Options Bar. for Controls. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 731 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame.

for Model Graphics Style. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and click OK. If you are unsure of what option to use. for Compressor. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. When you export the walkthrough. double-click Walkthrough 1. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 732 | Chapter 22 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Frames/sec. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. or rendering. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 To play the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 15. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Output Length. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. without opening Revit Structure 2009. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click Save. shading. Recording the Walkthrough on page 732. specifying the number of frames. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. reducing the size of the image. on the Options Bar. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. .Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. under Walkthroughs. shading with edges.rvt. c_Townhouse. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. select <Shading>. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. hidden line. click File menu ➤ Save As. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. The walkthrough is recorded. 3 Under Format.

including hip.Roofs 23 In this lesson. gutters. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. and soffits to the roofs that you create. In addition. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. mansard. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and low sloped roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. Before you can sketch the roof profile. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this tutorial. shed. In this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Structure 2009. In this lesson. gable. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 733 . you learn how to add fascia. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.

click Training Files. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 4 Click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. select Name.rvt. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 1'6'' to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 734 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. click Ref Plane. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Views (all). and open Imperial\i_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. and so on). 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 1'6" to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating an Extruded Roof | 735 . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 1'6" below Level 2. centerline.

16 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. 736 | Chapter 23 Roofs . select Chain. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. click Lines. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.

20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Next. Creating an Extruded Roof | 737 . so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. press TAB. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 17 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 21 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. press CTRL.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click Modify. 18 Select the edge of the roof. expand Sections (Type 1). and then select the exterior face of the wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and select the second wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

24 On the Options Bar. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 738. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. click model. 738 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. Next. and click Yes. expand Floor Plans. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 739 . To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. the roof is automatically created on the lowest level of the house and a notification dialog is displayed. 5 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Roofs. and double-click Garage Roof.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Because you are in a three-dimensional view.

Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 13 On the Design Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 11 Press CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar. By default. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 741. click Finish Roof. click the model. under Dimensions. select both slope definition lines. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. the roof slope has a 9'' rise over a 12'' run. click Modify. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 740 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 14 When you see the informational dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the View toolbar. enter 6'' for Rise/12" to change the roof slope. click (Properties). 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 741 . expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. sketch the chimney opening. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. i_Roofs. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. clear Defines slope. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. Next. When you complete the roof. expand Views (all). NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 3 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. press TAB. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and double-click Level 3. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. 6 Click to select all the walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.

select Defines Slope. 10 On the View menu. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Lines. 742 | Chapter 23 Roofs . click (Rectangle). click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 15 On the Options bar. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face.7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. add new slope lines to the roof. Next.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. close the roof sketch. and enter 2' 0'' for Overhang. clear Defines Slope. Next. and click (Pick Lines). click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans.rvt. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.19 Proceed to the next exercise. i_Roofs. click Lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 743 . 7 On the Options Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 743. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. select Defines slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 9 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical slope definition line. click Roof Properties. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. enter 2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 10 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. and click OK. 11 To trim the first line segment. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 14 Under Constraints. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. 744 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. raise the roof 2' above the current level. click (Trim/Extend).8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.

20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 745 .) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Modify. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 18 On the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels). click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 17 On the View toolbar. 21 Click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.16 On the View toolbar. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. join the two remaining walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). i_Roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 746 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 746. Next.rvt.

and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. enter 0' 0'' for Overhang. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and enter 1' 0'' for Overhang. Next. you add a slope-defining line. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. press TAB. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Trim/Extend). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 747 . 8 On the Tools toolbar. expand Views (all). and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Next. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 10 To trim the first line segment. select the left vertical roof line. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 4 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and double-click Level 2. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls.

you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. i_Roofs. expand 3D Views. (SteeringWheels). enter -2' 0'' for Base Offset From Level. click Modify. and click OK. expand Views (all). 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. select Defines slope. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. and press ENTER. click 20 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 19 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 Enter 6" for the rise value to change the roof slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 748 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 13 On the Options Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 748. click Roof Properties. 16 Under Constraints.12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. and double-click 3D. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. expand Floor Plans.

■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . To help locate the position of each split. click Ref Plane. you need to add two reference planes. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click (Pick Lines). clear Defines Slope. Before you can add slope arrows.15 to add the second slope arrow. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Tools menu. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. click Modify. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. and enter 2' 0'' for Offset. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. add two new slope arrows. 11 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 749 . verify ■ (Draw) is selected. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. click Slope Arrow. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Next.5 On the View menu. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next.

When eave heights differ. When you sketch a hip roof. click Edit. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. the adjacent eave heights must align. 18 Press CTRL. (Properties). use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.Begin the tail at the right reference plane. i_Roofs. and double-click Garage Roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and then click OK. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. click Align Eaves. (Properties). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select both slope arrows. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. select Defines Slope. enter 12'' for Rise/12". 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves.rvt. The eave lines display with a dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 750 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. and click 19 Under Constraints. click Modify. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Slope for Specify. 3 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. on the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. under Dimensions. and click OK. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 6'' for Rise/12". you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Under Dimensions. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 750. When aligning eaves. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 5 On the Options Bar. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

Creating a Mansard Roof | 751 . 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. on the File menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 10 On the Options Bar. click Save As. click Training Files. click Finish Roof. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select a method to align the eaves. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the View toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave.Next. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 751. 14 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and open Imperial\i_Mansard_Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.rvt. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

7 In the Project Browser. (Properties). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 Select the roof and.1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and double-click Level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click North. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Views (all). 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. 6 On the View toolbar. Next. 752 | Chapter 23 Roofs . on the Options Bar. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). click Lines. click Modify. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.

17 On the View toolbar. click (Pick Lines). on the File menu. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click mansard roof. click Save As. click . Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 754. and click OK. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Mansard Roof | 753 . 14 On the Options Bar. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then select Defines slope. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Finish Roof. press TAB. under Dimensions. click Modify. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. and select the remaining three lines.10 On the Options Bar. enter 3'' for Rise/12". and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

After you add the roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.rvt. Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 754 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. under Floor Plans. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click Training Files. click Pick Walls. double-click Roof. you add a roof to a building shell.

Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. click (Trim/Extend). Because the walls are not continuous. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 755 . verify that Defines slope is not selected.4 On the Options Bar.

Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click OK. click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.EPDM. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. click Roof Properties. select Steel Truss . 756 | Chapter 23 Roofs .Insulation on Metal Deck .8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 11 On the Design Bar.

The roof has been created. click (Draw Split Lines). 18 Move the cursor down. double-click Roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. under Floor Plans. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. In the next steps. and click to select it. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line Creating a Low Slope Roof | 757 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. on the Options Bar. move the cursor horizontally to the left. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. and select a point on the opposite roof line. The roof is now divided into 6 sections. (Add points).You create a split line vertically down the center. 20 Using the same method. Next. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 758 | Chapter 23 Roofs . 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line.

click (Modify Sub-Elements). exact placement of the points is not important. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 759 . and press ENTER. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. enter -2''. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. 25 Using the same method.In this exercise. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Layout tools in Revit Structure such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. for the dimension.

27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 760 | Chapter 23 Roofs .The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and press ENTER. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges. 29 On the Design Bar. click (Modify Sub-Elements). click Modify. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.

Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. under Construction. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Properties). leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. By making the insulation layer variable. The slab has not responded exactly as intended. In some cases this type of slope is desired. click Edit/New. 31 Select the roof slab. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Thermal/Air Layer. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 761 . for Structure. 36 View the results in the section view. The entire slab is sloped. select Variable.

and Soffits In this lesson. Gutters. on the File menu. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and click Open. click (Properties). and soffits in Revit Structure. Creating Fascia. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 762 | Chapter 23 Roofs . Gutters. you can easily create its fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating Fascia.rvt. gutters. select Fascia-Built-Up. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. After you create a roof. 37 If you want to save your changes.The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise.rfa and Gutter Profile-Cove. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Training Files. gutters. and open Imperial\Families\Profiles\Roofs. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Training Files. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and Soffits on page 762. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. and soffits. click Save As. 3 Press CTRL. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn how to create roof fascia.

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters on page 764. Creating Roof Fascia | 763 . select Fascia-Built-Up: 1 x 12 w 1 x 8 for Profile.7 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. under Construction. click Duplicate. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. click in the Value field for Material. click (Properties). and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. .rvt. 10 Click to place the gutter. select Gutter-Bevel: 5'' x 5'' for Profile. click Edit/New. c_Condominium. click Duplicate. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 3 In the Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. and click OK three times. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name.Creating Gutters In this exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 764 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. click Pick Roofs. expand Floor Plans. Creating Soffits In this exercise. c_Condominium. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Soffits | 765 . 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating Soffits on page 765.

expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. click Finish Sketch. click Join Geometry. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.4 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu. and then select the soffit to join them. expand Views (all). 766 | Chapter 23 Roofs .

and save the exercise file with a unique name.9 If you want to save your changes. Creating Soffits | 767 . click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu.

768 .

creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you not only simplify their placement. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. After you create a model group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this tutorial. and typical office layouts. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. or with those working on a different project. 769 . place. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Creating. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. In this exercise. hotel rooms. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. When you make changes to a nested group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. the host group is also updated automatically. You mirror one instance of the group. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. In another exercise. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you also simplify the modification process. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Modifying. You can also nest groups within other groups. For example. and modify repetitive units. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Revit Structure. By grouping objects.

770 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. expand Floor Plans. and double-click First Floor. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 771 . and click OK. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

772 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify.

under Groups. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 773 . right-click Typical Kitchen. click Modify. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.

The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments.14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. 774 | Chapter 24 Grouping . NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy. click (Mirror).

and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 775 . click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

one mirrored. click Modify.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. and one rotated. 776 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. as shown. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click Save.rvt. Modifying a Group | 777 . i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. click Save As.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group.

press TAB. 8 On the Design Bar. NOTE To display an excluded element. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. select the element. 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall.).). and click member to group instance. click Modify.).).3 Click (Group Member. 778 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

11 On the Design Bar.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. clear Tag on Placement. Modifying a Group | 779 . 13 In the Type Selector. move the cursor to the left. click Door. click Wall. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''.

and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group.16 On the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. In edit group mode. 780 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. move the cursor up. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Modify. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening.

all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. which acts as the host. created in an earlier lesson. Nesting Groups | 781 .24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. you add the Typical Kitchen group. and click OK. 28 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. under Constraints. for Unconnected Height. enter 3' 4''. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. click 27 For Base Offset. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 25 Select the opening. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. enter 7'. and on the Options Bar.

click Edit Group. 4 On the group editor toolbar.rvt. 782 | Chapter 24 Grouping . in the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click (Add to Group). under Floor Plans. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 783 .6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. 7 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. In the next exercise. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 784 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as text. such as door and window tags. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to a group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click to draw a rectangular region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 785 . click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.

click Text. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 786 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. as shown. and click OK. and select the text note and the filled region. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 9 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click (Group). 14 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add an arc leader.

under Groups. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Because the detail group contains variables. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. double-click Second Floor. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 787 . 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 In the Project Browser.

3 On the Options Bar. 788 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 5 On the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.manner that a drawing component can be added. under Floor Plans. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. as shown. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader.rvt. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify.

Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. for Attached Detail Group Name.7 On the Options Bar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Check None. Using Attached Detail Groups | 789 . and click OK. click (Filter Selection). click (Group). 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor.

Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Modify. and click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Training File 790 | Chapter 24 Grouping . the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.

accept the default template file. verify that Same as group name is selected.rvt. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Create Instance. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. for Create new. verify that Project is selected. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. and click OK. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. Saving and Loading Groups | 791 .rvt. and click Open. In this case. expand Groups. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog. 3 For File name. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Save Group. and click Save. browse to the Desktop. A warning dialog displays. click Desktop. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and expand Model. click Modify. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 12 On the Design Bar.

and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 18 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Modify. click Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. When a group is converted to a link. click Link.rvt file is added as a link to the project. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 17 On the Design Bar. 792 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. verify that Attached Details is selected only. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click OK. expand Revit Links. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. and the link is removed. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and click OK. click Use Existing.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful